Samsung Printer SCX 5835 Series User Guide

SCX-5835_5935 Series  
Multi Functional Printer  
User’s Guide  
imagine the possibilities  
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.  
To receive a more complete service, please  
register your product at  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
51  
Content_ 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Content_ 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Content_ 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
92  
Content_ 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
Content_ 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
safety information  
These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any potential  
damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.  
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and  
instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future  
reference.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS  
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of  
danger.  
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:  
Warning  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.  
Caution  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.  
Do not attempt.  
Do not disassemble.  
Do not touch.  
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.  
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.  
Call the service center for help.  
Follow directions explicitly.  
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT  
Warning  
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the  
electrical outlet is not grounded.  
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power  
cord.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be  
crushed by a heavy object could result in electric  
shock or fire.  
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,  
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarrettes,  
etc.).  
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not  
handle the plug with wet hands.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Safety information_ 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,  
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,  
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the  
machine.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Caution  
During an electrical storm or for a period of  
non-operation,remove the power plug from the  
electrical outlet.  
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not  
attempt to force it in.  
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
could result in electric shock.  
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.  
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC  
interface cords.  
Burns could occur.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears  
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections  
and request assistance from qualified service personnel.  
If the machine does not operate properly after these  
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all  
interface connections and request assistance from qualified  
service personnel.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire..  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in  
performance, unplug the machine from all interface  
connections and request assistance from qualified service  
personnel.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
OPERATING METHOD  
Caution  
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.  
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the  
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children  
to touch.  
It can cause damage to the machine.  
You (children) may be burned.  
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine  
and paper tray.  
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers  
or sharp metal objects.  
You may get injured.  
It can cause damage to the machine.  
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.  
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output  
tray.  
This could result in elevated component temperatures which  
can cause damage or fire.  
It could cause damage to the machine.  
Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing  
jammed paper.  
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.  
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from  
You may get hurt.  
the electrical outlet.  
Safety information_ 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION / MOVING  
Warning  
Do not place the machine in an area with dust,  
humidity or water leaks.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Caution  
When moving the machine, turn the power off and  
disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at  
least two people.  
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight  
location, such as a closet.  
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.  
The machine could fall, causing human injury or  
machine damage.  
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.  
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical  
outlet.  
The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine  
damage.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
The machine should be connected to  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
the power level which is specified on the label.  
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric  
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are  
shock or fire.  
using, contact the electrical utility company.  
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if  
necessary.  
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters  
(79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.  
or larger.  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could  
result in electric shock or fire.  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
MAINTENANCE / CHECKING  
Caution  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before  
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.  
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the  
machine with benzene, paint thinner or achol; do not  
spray water directly into the machine.  
Children (you) may get hurt.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
When you are working inside the machine replacing  
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the  
machine.  
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by  
yourself.  
It can cause damage to the machine. Call a  
You may get injured.  
certified technician when the machine needs repair.  
Safety information_ 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean  
from dust or water.  
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's  
guide provided with the machine.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.  
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with  
screws.  
The machine should only be repaired by Samsung service  
technician.  
SUPPLY USAGE  
Caution  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.  
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep  
them away from children.  
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.  
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.  
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner  
cartridge or fuser unit.  
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to  
the machine.  
It can cause an explosion or fire.  
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a  
service fee will be charged.  
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,  
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.  
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.  
Safety information_ 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
regulatory information  
This machine is designed for our sound environment and certified with several regulatory statements.  
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and  
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to  
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.  
WARNING  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,  
can damage your eyes.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
TAIWAN ONLY  
OZONE SAFETY  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is  
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.  
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.  
Regulatory information_ 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MERCURY SAFETY  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)  
PERCHLORATE WARNING  
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in  
California USA.  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)  
POWER SAVER  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.  
RECYCLING  
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
CHINA ONLY  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)  
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its  
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of  
wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and  
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed  
with other commercial wastes for disposal.  
Regulatory information_ 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)  
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household  
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium  
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to  
human health or the environment.  
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your  
local, free battery return system.  
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS  
FCC Information to the User  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These  
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la  
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
RFID (RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFACE DEVICE)  
RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. (U.S.A., France, Taiwan only)  
Regulatory information_ 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TAIWAN ONLY  
RUSSIA ONLY  
AE95  
FAX BRANDING  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any  
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  
on the first page of the transmission the following information:  
1. the date and time of transmission  
2. identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and  
3. telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is  
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can  
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require  
modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given  
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service  
Regulatory information_ 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the  
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether  
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving  
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone  
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on  
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may  
cause harm to the telephone network.  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s  
authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company  
should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease  
service, providing that they:  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in  
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and  
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with  
your machine.  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power  
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency  
number.  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)  
Important  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the  
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until  
you have another fuse cover.  
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal  
13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.  
Regulatory information_ 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important warning:  
You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or  
green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable  
93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of  
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics  
Co., Ltd. representative.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched  
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and  
compatible PBXs of the European countries:  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional  
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the  
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
OPENSSL LICENSE  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
Regulatory information_ 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with  
Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to  
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this  
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young's,  
and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given  
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation  
(online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an  
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply  
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.  
Regulatory information_ 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Regulatory information_ 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHINA ONLY  
Regulatory information_ 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
about this user’s guide  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step  
during actual usage. Valuable for both novice and professional users can refer to this as a guide for installing and using the  
machine.  
Read the safety information before using the machine.  
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See "Troubleshooting" on page 107.)  
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See "Glossary" on page 134.)  
Use Index to find information.  
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.  
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.  
CONVENTION  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Machine refers to printer or MFP.  
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:  
CONVENTION  
DESCRIPTION  
EXAMPLE  
Bold  
Note  
For texts on the display or button names on the machine.  
Start  
Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function  
and feature.  
The date format may differ from country  
to country.  
Caution  
Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical  
damage or malfunction.  
Do not touch the green underside of the  
toner cartridge.  
Footnote  
Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.  
Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information.  
a. pages per minute  
(“Cross-reference”)  
About this user’s guide_ 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FINDING MORE INFORMATION  
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.  
MATERIAL NAME  
Quick Install Guide  
DESCRIPTION  
This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the  
machine.  
Online User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining  
your machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.  
Network Website  
Driver Help  
Service, etc.This Website will be convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously. You can  
This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing. (See "Samsung tab"  
Samsung website  
About this user’s guide_ 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
features of your new product  
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.  
SPECIAL FEATURES  
Print with excellent quality and speed  
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3  
You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi effective  
output.  
Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 33 ppm and  
letter-sized paper at up to 35 ppm.  
For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at  
up to 17 ipm and letter-sized paper at up to 18 ipm.  
©Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.  
Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are trademarks  
of Zoran Corporation.  
136 PS3 fonts  
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.  
Handle many different types of printable material  
Print in various environments  
The multi-purpose tray supports envelopes, labels,  
custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The  
multi-purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper.  
You can print with Windows 2000 and Windows  
XP/2003/Vista as well as Linux and Macintosh systems.  
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a  
network interface.  
The 500-sheet tray 1 and 500-sheet optional tray support  
plain paper in various sizes.  
Create professional documents  
Copy originals in several formats  
Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with  
words, such as “Confidential”. (See "Using watermarks" on  
Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your  
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of  
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See  
Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the  
original document on a single page. (See "2-up or 4-up  
There are special functions to erase catalog and newspaper  
The print quality and image size may be adjusted and  
enhance at the same time.  
You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain  
Scan the originals and send it right away  
Save time and money  
Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,  
TIFF and PDF formats.  
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single  
Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using  
Networks scanning. (See "Sending a scanned image to  
This machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.  
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper  
(double-sided printing). (See "Printing on both sides of  
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax  
You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also  
send the fax to several stored destinations.  
After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax  
reports according to the setting.  
Expand your machine’s capacity  
Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their  
Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3 (PS)  
enables PS printing.  
Use USB flash memory devices  
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various  
ways with your machine.  
You can scan documents and save them to the device.  
You can directly print data stored to the device.  
Features of your new product_ 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FEATURES BY MODELS  
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business.  
Features by models include:  
FEATURES  
SCX-5835FN  
SCX-5935FN  
USB 2.0  
USB Memory Interface  
Document Feeder  
Hard Disk  
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
FAX  
( : Included, Blank: Not available)  
Features of your new product_ 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.  
introduction  
These are the main components of your machine:  
This chapter includes:  
MACHINE OVERVIEW  
Front view  
Optional tray 2a  
Tray 1  
Scanner lock switch  
Scanner glass  
9
19  
20  
Document feeder cover  
Multi-purpose tray  
Front cover  
1
2
11  
12  
Document feeder width  
guides  
10  
a.Optional device.  
Document feeder input tray  
Document feeder output tray  
Front cover handle  
Document output tray  
USB memory port  
Control panel  
3
4
5
6
13  
14  
15  
16  
Multi-purpose tray handle  
Toner cartridge  
Multi-purpose tray paper  
width guides  
Handle  
7
8
17  
18  
Paper level indicator  
Scanner lid  
Introduction_ 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Rear view  
USB host port  
Duplex unit  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
USB port  
Rear cover  
Network port  
Power receptacle  
Power-switch  
Telephone line socket  
Extension telephone socket  
(EXT)  
Control board cover  
5
10  
Introduction_ 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW  
Guides you to the machine setup and advanced settings. (See "Machine Setup" on page 92.)  
Shows jobs currently running, queued jobs and completed.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Machine Setup  
Job Status  
Status  
Shows the status of your machine. (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 30.)  
Displays machine’s current status and prompts during an operation. Set menus easily using the touch screen.  
Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.  
Deletes characters in the edit area.  
Display screen  
Numeric keypad  
Clear  
In standby mode, redials the last number. Also in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Performs same as you hold a handset under the telephone line is engaged.  
Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.  
Redial/Pause  
On Hook Dial  
Interrupt  
Reverts the current settings to default values.  
10 Clear All  
Sends the machine into power saver mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this button. (See "Power Saver  
11 Power Saver  
Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or  
resume.  
12 Stop  
13 Start  
Starts a job.  
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.  
Introduction_ 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED  
INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND  
USEFUL BUTTONS  
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.  
Touch screen  
The touch screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
The machine is off-line.  
The machine is in power saver mode. When  
data is received, or any button is pressed, it  
switches to on-line automatically.  
Off  
machine. Once you press the home icon (  
main screen.  
) on the screen, it shows the  
Green Blinking  
When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine  
is receiving data from the computer.  
When the backlight blinks rapidly, the  
machine is printing data.  
On  
Blinking  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
Red  
A minor error has occurred and the machine is  
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message. When the problem is  
cleared, the machine resumes.  
The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.  
Order a new toner cartridge. You can  
temporarily improve print quality by  
redistributing the toner. (See "Replacing the  
: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.  
Copy: Enters the Copy menu.  
Fax: Enters the Fax menu.  
Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan to PC, Scan to Server menu.  
Stored Documents: Enters the Stored Documents menu. (See  
USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your  
machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.  
SmarThru Workflow: Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu.  
(Optional)  
Toner Info: Shows amount of toner used.  
LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.  
On  
The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove  
the old toner cartridge and install a new one.  
A paper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing  
The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in  
the tray.  
The machine has stopped due to a major  
error. Check the display message. (See  
: Changes the display language on the touch screen.  
: This icon appears only when you connect a USB memory module.  
Logout: Logs out from the currently logged-in account.  
Icons shown on the display screen such as SmarThru Workflow  
may be grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program  
installed in your machine.  
To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press  
the left/right arrow on the display screen.  
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in  
the message or refer to troubleshooting part. (See "Understanding  
display messages" on page 112.) If the problem persists, call for  
service.  
Machine Setup button  
When you press the Machine Setup button, you can browse current  
machine settings or change machine values. (See "Machine Setup" on  
page 92.)  
: Allows you to move directly to the Copy, Fax, Scan, Stored  
Documents menu directly.  
Machine Status: Shows machine’s current status.  
Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.  
Introduction_ 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the given amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is  
shut down or reset.  
Job Status button  
When you press Job Status button, the screen lists the currently running,  
queued and completed jobs.  
Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.  
Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.  
Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.  
No.: Gives the order of jobs.  
Job Name: Shows job information, such as name and type.  
Status: Gives the current status of each job.  
User: Provides user name-mainly computer name.  
Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient  
phone number and other information.  
Detail: Shows detailed information of selected option on the Current  
Job, Completed Job and Active Notice list.  
Delete: Removes selected job from the list.  
Delete All: Removes all jobs from the list.  
Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.  
Power Saver button  
When the machine is not in use, save electricity by pressing the power save  
mode button. Pressing this button for one second puts the machine into  
If you press this button for more than three seconds, a window appears,  
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is  
turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Off  
The machine is not in the power save mode.  
The machine is in the power save mode.  
Blue  
On  
Interrupt button  
When you press Interrupt button, the machine goes into interrupt mode,  
which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent  
copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Off  
The machine is not in interrupt printing  
mode.  
Blue  
On  
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.  
Introduction_ 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2.  
getting started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.  
This chapter includes:  
3. Remove tape holding the machine securely.  
4. Install the toner cartridge.  
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the  
Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and  
follow the steps below:  
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.  
7. Turn the machine on.  
1. Select a stable location.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow  
extra space to open covers and trays.  
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the  
edge of your desk or table.  
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE  
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer., you  
must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD . The  
software CD provides you with the following software.  
OS  
CONTENTS  
Windows  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of  
your machine’s features.  
PostScript printer driver: Use the PostScript driver to  
print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the  
PS language.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image  
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning  
documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
SmarThru Officea: This program is the accompanying  
Windows-based software for your multifunctional  
machine.  
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,500 m (4,921 ft). Refer to the  
altitude setting to optimize your printing. (See "Altitude adjustment" on  
page 41.)  
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline  
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be  
affected.  
Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you to  
print PDF files directly.  
Samsung Scan Manager: You can find out about  
Scan Manager program information and installed scan  
driver's condition.  
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP  
addresses.  
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.  
Getting started_ 32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Macintosh  
OS  
CONTENTS  
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)  
Macintosh  
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use this  
file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and  
print documents.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for  
scanning documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
Scan Manager: You can find out about Scan  
Manager program information and installed scan  
driver's condition.  
OPERATING  
SYSTEM  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
CPU  
Intel  
Processors  
PowerPC G4/  
G5  
RAM  
Mac OS X  
10.4 or lower  
128 MB for a  
PowerPC based  
Mac (512 MB)  
512 MB for a  
Intel-based Mac  
(1 GB)  
1 GB  
Mac OS X  
10.5  
Intel  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
Linux  
Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full  
advantage of your machine’s features.  
Printer Description (PPD) file: Use this file to run  
your machine from a Linux computer and print  
documents.  
Processors  
867 MHz or  
faster Power  
PC G4/ G5  
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.  
Linux  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Operating  
system  
RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)  
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)  
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)  
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)  
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)  
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful  
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open  
another image editor program, such as Adobe Photoshop, from  
SmarThru Office . For details, refer to the on screen help supplied on  
the SmarThru Office program. (See "Smarthru Office" on page 100.)  
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)  
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
CPU  
RAM  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)  
512 MB (1024 MB)  
Windows  
Free HDD space  
1 GB (2GB)  
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.  
It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OPERATING  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
SYSTEM  
CPU  
RAM  
Windows  
2000  
Pentium II 400 MHz  
(Pentium III 933 MHz)  
64 MB  
(128 MB)  
600 MB  
INSTALLING USB CONNECTED MACHINE’S  
DRIVER  
Windows XP  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(256 MB)  
1.5 GB  
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your  
computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network,  
skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected  
page 39.)  
Windows  
Server 2003  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(512 MB)  
1.25 GB to  
2 GB  
Windows  
Vista  
Pentium IV 3 GHz  
512 MB  
(1024 MB)  
15 GB  
Selecting Custom installation allows you to choose programs to  
install.  
Windows  
Server 2008  
Pentium IV 1 GHz  
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
10 GB  
Only use an USB cable no longer then 3m (118 inch. ). Data might not  
be transferred to your machine.  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all  
Windows operating systems.  
Users who have an administrator right can install the software.  
Windows Terminal Service is compatable with this machine.  
Getting started_ 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. and then click Next.  
Windows  
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.  
The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a  
machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for  
machine operations will be installed.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the  
installation procedure, click  
in the upper right corner of the box  
to close the window, or click Cancel.  
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window  
appear.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents  
your drive. Click OK.  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All programs > Accessories  
> Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents  
If your machine is not already connected to the computer, the  
following window will appear.  
your drive and click OK.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the  
User Account Control windows.  
3. Click Next.  
After connecting the machine, click Next.  
If you don’t want to connect the machine at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. The installation will then  
start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may  
differ depending on the machine and interface in use.  
5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page  
appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click  
Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip.  
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
7. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from  
Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now registered  
to the Samsung web site.  
8. Otherwise, just click Finish.  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
For windows follow the steps below to uninstall the driver.  
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > your  
printer driver name > Maintenance.  
c) Select Remove and click Next.  
Getting started_ 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item  
individually.  
d) Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.  
e) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.  
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from  
your computer.  
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
e) Double-click the Installer icon.  
f) Enter the password and click OK.  
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.  
h) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.  
f) After the software is removed, click Finish.  
Macintosh  
i) When the message which warns that all applications will close on  
your computer appears, click Continue.  
The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD  
file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only  
available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for  
printing on a Macintosh computer.  
j) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.  
Linux  
Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the  
driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will automatically be installed as  
well.  
Also, it provides you with the TWAIN driver for scanning on a Macintosh  
computer.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver  
package for using your machine with a Linux computer easily in UI  
based management tool.(See "Using the Linux Unified Driver  
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
5. Double-click the Installer icon.  
on.  
6. Enter the password and click OK.  
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in rootin the  
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.  
Login field and enter the system password.  
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for  
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to  
install.  
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your  
The software CD will run automatically.  
computer appears, click Continue.  
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the  
bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the  
following:  
icon at the  
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.  
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is  
/mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh  
If you still failed to run the software CD , type the followings in sequence:  
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom  
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, open the Applications folder > System  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
12. Click Add on the Printer List.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.  
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.  
For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB  
connection.  
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun  
software package installed and configured.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, click Default and find the USB connection.  
14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.  
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default  
machine.  
15. Click Add.  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.  
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Getting started_ 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable  
and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer  
connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the  
host computer to print.  
Host computer  
A computer which is directly connected to  
the machine by USB cable.  
1
2
Client computers  
Computers which use the machine shared  
through the host computer.  
5. When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop  
icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience.  
If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available  
through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver  
package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or  
Image Manager.  
Windows  
Setting up a host computer  
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
Installing the driver in the text mode:  
If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to  
install the driver, you have to use the driver in the text mode.  
Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]#  
./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the terminal screen. The  
installation is completed.  
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers .  
For Windows XP/2003 select Printer and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista select Control Panel > Hardware and  
Sound > Printers.  
When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation  
instructions above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh  
on the terminal screen.  
4. Double-click your printer driver icon.  
5. From the Printer menu, select Sharing....  
6. Check the Share this printer.  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
7. Fill in the Shared Name field. Click OK.  
Setting up a client computer  
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.  
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
3. Select All programs > Accessories > Window Explorer.  
powered on.  
b) When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in  
the Login field and enter the system password.  
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver.  
If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
c) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
The software CD will run automatically.  
4. Enter in IP address of the host computer and press Enter in your  
keyboard.  
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the  
icon at  
the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears,  
type in:  
In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill  
in User ID and password of the host computer account.  
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount  
is /mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh  
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun  
software package installed and configured.  
d) Click Uninstall.  
5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.  
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.  
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.  
Macintosh  
e) Click Next.  
f) Click Finish.  
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5. Refer to Mac Help for  
other OS versions.  
SHARING YOUR MACHINE LOCALLY  
Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine  
locally.  
Getting started_ 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting up a host computer  
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s  
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click  
Print & Fax.  
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.  
4. Select “Share this printer”.  
Setting up a client computer  
1. Install your printer driver. (See "Installing USB connected machine’s  
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click  
Print & Fax.  
3. Press the “+” icon.  
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.  
4. Select your machine and click Add.  
Getting started_ 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.  
network setup  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.  
This chapter includes:  
to various network environments.  
Customize machine settings.  
NETWORK ENVIRONMENT  
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding  
port on your machine.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of  
network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download  
this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.  
SetIP  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the  
machine's control panel.  
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually  
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. (See "Using  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine:  
CONFIGURING TCP/IP  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX  
When you connect your machine to a network, you must first configure the  
TCP/IP settings for the machine. After you have assigned and verified the  
TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the software on each computer on  
the network.  
Network interface  
Network operating system  
Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5  
Setting the network address  
Network protocols  
TCP/IP on Windows  
IPP  
DHCP  
SNMP  
BOOTP  
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.  
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps below:  
1. Connect your machine to the network with an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.  
2. Turned on the machine.  
3. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
If you want to setup DHCP network protocol, go to the  
4. Press Admin Setting.  
http://developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the  
program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system,  
parameter automatically. Follow the instruction in the installation  
window. This program does not support Linux.  
5. When the login message appears, enter password.  
Touch the password input area, then the question marks appears. Use  
the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once the  
password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
6. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
7. Select TCP/IP Protocol.  
8. Press IP Setting.  
INTRODUCING USEFUL NETWORK PROGRAMS  
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in  
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing  
several machines on the network is possible.  
9. Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway  
address fields. Touch the input area, then enter addresses by number  
keypad on the control panel.  
10. Press OK.  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
Web server embedded on your network machine server, which allows you  
to:  
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect  
Network setup_ 38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next.  
INSTALLING NETWORK CONNECTED  
MACHINE’S DRIVER  
Selecting Custom installation allows you to choose programs to  
install.  
Windows  
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for  
machine operations will be installed.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. For details  
about connecting to the network, see the supplied machine’s Quick  
Install Guide.  
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window  
appear.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents  
your drive. Click OK.  
5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the  
machine you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All programs > Accessories  
> Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents  
your drive and click OK.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the  
User Account Control windows.  
3. Click Next.  
If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine  
to the network. To add the machine to the network, enter the  
port name and the IP address for the machine. To verify your  
machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network  
Configuration page.  
To find a shared machine (UNC Path), select Shared Printer  
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared  
printer by clicking the Browse button.  
If you cannot find your machine in network,turn off the firewall  
and click Update. For Windows operating system, click Start >  
Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page  
appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click  
Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip.  
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
8. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from  
Samsung, select the checkbox and click Finish. You are now registered  
to the Samsung web site.  
Network setup_ 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
9. Otherwise, just click Finish.  
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.  
Your machine’s IP address appears on the Printer List, and is set as  
the default machine.  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
For windows follow the steps below to uninstall the driver.  
18. Click Add.  
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.  
powered on.  
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > your  
printer driver name > Maintenance.  
c) Select Remove and click Next.  
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item  
individually.  
d) Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.  
e) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.  
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from  
your computer.  
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
e) Double-click the Installer icon.  
f) Enter the password and click OK.  
f) After the software is removed, click Finish.  
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.  
h) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.  
i) When the message which warns that all applications will close on  
your computer appears, click Continue.  
Macintosh  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.  
j) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.  
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Linux  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.  
5. Double-click the Installer icon.  
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop.  
4. Double-click the Linux folder.  
6. Enter the password and click OK.  
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.  
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for  
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.  
6. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.  
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.  
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
10. Select your machine and click Next.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to  
install.  
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.  
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, open the Applications folder > System  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
12. Click Add on the Printer List.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.  
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.  
For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, click IP.  
14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.  
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance  
may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option.  
15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.  
16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine  
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue  
first.  
17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.  
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
For Mac OS X 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose  
Network setup_ 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4.  
basic setup  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set  
or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.  
This chapter includes:  
4. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
5. Press Change Admin. Password.  
6. Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.  
7. Press OK.  
ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT  
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined  
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will  
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality  
of print.  
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the  
machine.  
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME  
When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print.  
They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to  
change it for the correct time being.  
If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time  
and date once the power has been restored.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
1 Normal  
4. Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.  
2 High 1  
0
5. Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
4. Click Machine Settings.  
use the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
6. Press OK.  
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time  
Format.  
5. Click Altitude Adj.  
6. Select the appropriate altitude value.  
7. Click Apply.  
CHANGING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
To change the language that appears on the display, follow the steps below:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
If your machine is connected via a USB cable, set the altitude in  
Altitude Adjustment option on the machine’s display screen. (See  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
SETTING THE AUTHENTICATION PASSWORD  
4. Press the General tab.  
To set up your machine or change the settings, you must first login. To  
change password, follow the steps below:  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.  
6. Select the appropriate language.  
7. Press OK.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with the number  
keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK.  
(Factory setting:1111)  
Basic setup_ 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
In the control panel  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
CHANGING THE COUNTRY  
You can change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size  
will be changed automatically for your country.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
4. Press the General tab.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray  
Management.  
4. Press the General tab.  
6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Country.  
6. Select the desired country.  
7. Press OK.  
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen are  
grayed out.  
7. Press OK.  
SETTING JOB TIMEOUT  
In the computer  
Windows  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers .  
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the  
current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the amount of  
time the machine will wait.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
For Windows XP/2003 select Printer and Faxes.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
For Windows Vista select Control Panel > Hardware and  
Sound > Printers.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
3. Right-click your machine and press Printing Preferences.  
4. Click Paper tab.  
5. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.  
6. Press OK.  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press Timers.  
6. Select appropriate option.  
System Timeout: The machine returns to the default value after  
certain time the machine waits. The maximum time you can set is10  
minutes.  
Held Job Timeout: When error occurs while printing and there is  
no signal from the computer, the machine holds a job for a specific  
time period. You can set a time period for at least an hour.  
Macintosh  
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to  
change the default setting manually each time they want to print using  
other settings.  
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.  
2. Open the File menu and click Print.  
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.  
7. Select On.  
8. Select a duration using left/right arrows.  
9. Press OK.  
4. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.  
5. Go to Paper pane.  
6. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print.  
7. Click Print to print.  
USING POWER SAVING FEATURE  
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save  
power.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at  
once.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
4. Press the General tab.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
5. Press down arrow to switch the screen. Press Power Saver.  
6. Press Power Save.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
7. Select appropriate time.  
4. Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.  
8. Press OK.  
5. Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.  
For example, if you want to change the default brightness & darkness  
setting for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the brightness  
& darkness.  
SETTING THE DEFAULT TRAY AND PAPER  
6. Press OK.  
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing  
Basic setup_ 42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
CHANGING THE FONT SETTING  
Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the  
symbol keyboard.  
Symbols  
7
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.  
Enters a blank between characters.  
Saves and closes input result.  
Cancels and closes input result.  
Space  
OK  
8
9
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as  
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
4. Click Machine Settings.  
Cancel  
10  
When you enter an email address, the email keyboard for email pops  
up. After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.  
Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,  
Bcc, Subject, Message.  
5. Click PCL.  
6. Select your preferred font in the Symbol Set list.  
7. Click Apply.  
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding  
languages.  
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic  
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)  
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek  
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,  
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic  
OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B  
UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD  
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the  
keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is the same as a normal  
keyboard for easy usability.  
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters, then the keyboard  
pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the  
lowercase letters.  
Moves the cursor between characters in the input  
area.  
Left/Right  
Backspace  
Delete  
1
2
3
Deletes the character on the left side of the  
cursor.  
Deletes the character on the right side of the  
cursor.  
Deletes all characters in the input area.  
Clear  
4
5
Enters letters within this line.  
Input area  
Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase  
keys or vice versa.  
Shift  
6
Basic setup_ 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5.  
media and tray  
This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.  
PREPARING ORIGINALS  
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or  
larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper, in order to prevent  
paper jam, low print quality, machine damage.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
Coated paper  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Torn paper  
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with  
other unusual characteristics.  
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. And align it with the  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
LOADING ORIGINALS  
You can use the scanner glass or the automatic document feeder to load an  
original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.  
On the scanner glass  
Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original is  
detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over the  
original on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for  
colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.  
3. Close the scanner lid.  
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy  
quality and toner consumption.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the  
printout. Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the  
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then  
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,  
start copying with the lid open.  
Media and tray_ 44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.  
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid  
may fall on your hands and get hurt.  
Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or  
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.  
Guidelines to select the print media  
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide  
may cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased paper jams  
Premature wear on the machine.  
In the document feeder  
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m2,  
20 lb bond) for one job.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are  
described in print media specifications. (See "Print media specifications"  
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for  
your project.  
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
2. Load the original face up into the document feeder. Make sure that the  
bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the  
document input tray.  
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and  
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of  
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,  
or other variables over which cannot be controled.  
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the  
warranty or service agreements.  
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type  
Media sizes supported in each mode  
3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
MODE  
Copy mode  
SIZE  
SOURCE  
All sizes supported by  
the machine  
tray 1 (Legal, US  
Folio, Letter, A4,  
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5)  
optional tray 2  
Print mode  
Fax mode  
(Legal, US Folio,  
Letter, A4, Oficio,  
JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5)  
multi-purpose tray  
Duplex printinga  
Letter, A4, Legal, US  
Folio, Oficio  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lb bond) only  
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the  
printout. Always keep the glass clean. (See "Cleaning the scan  
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE  
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To  
change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.  
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines  
for use with your machine.  
Media and tray_ 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1. Push the back plate of the tray outwards completely so that it can extend  
LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY  
Tray 1 / optional tray  
the length of the tray.  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into tray 1.  
Tray 1 can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of plain paper.  
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to  
load an additional 500 sheets of plain paper. (See "Available supplies" on  
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or  
service agreements.  
2. Squeeze the paper length guide and slide it to the correct position for the  
1. Pull out tray. And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading.  
paper size you are loading, which is marked at the bottom of the tray.  
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing down.  
1 Paper length guide  
3. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
4. After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and  
slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray.  
1 Paper limit mark  
2 Paper level  
indicator  
Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.  
1 Paper width guide  
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to  
warp.  
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper  
jams.  
1 Full  
2 Empty  
4. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.  
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control  
If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether  
the paper meets the media specification. Then, try placing one  
sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray. (See "Print media  
The settings made from the machine driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
Media and tray_ 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
a) To print in application, open an application and start the print  
menu.  
3. Load the paper.  
b) Open Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing  
c) Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an  
appropriate paper type.  
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to  
Label.  
d) Select tray in paper source, then press OK.  
e) Start printing in application.  
Multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page  
printing on colored paper.  
4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them  
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be  
bent, which will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the  
multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is  
still paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types  
of print media.  
Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and  
print quality problems. (See "Print media specifications" on  
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
1. Hold the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open.  
When printing the special media, you must follow the  
loading guideline. (See "Printing on special media" on  
page 48.)  
When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose  
tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try  
printing again.  
When paper does not feed well while printing, push the  
paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.  
5. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the  
multi-purpose tray.  
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control  
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
The settings made from the machine driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
loading originals.  
a) To print in application, open an application and start the  
print menu.  
b) Open Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing  
c) Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select  
an appropriate paper type.  
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type  
to Label.  
d) Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.  
e) Start printing in application.  
f) After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.  
Media and tray_ 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
PRINTING ON SPECIAL MEDIA  
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.  
When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a  
time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray. (See  
OPTIONAL  
TRAY  
MULTI-PURPOSE  
TRAY  
TYPES  
Plain a  
TRAY 1  
1 Pressure lever  
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:  
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Thicka  
-
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed  
90 g/m2 otherwise, jam may occur.  
Thina  
Cotton  
-
-
-
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less  
than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.  
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either  
damaged.  
Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and  
pressure of the machine during operation.  
Color  
Preprinteda  
Recyclea  
Envelope  
Transparency  
Labels  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,  
self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to  
the corner of the envelope.  
CardStock  
Bond  
Archivea  
a.A6, Statement are supported only in the multi-purpose tray.  
1
2
Acceptable  
Envelope  
Unacceptable  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the  
envelopes.  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that  
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s  
fusing temperature for 0.1 second. To view the fusing temperature,  
check your machine’s specification. (See "General specifications" on  
page 127.) The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or  
jams, and may even damage the fuser.  
To print an envelope, place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top  
left side.  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from  
the edges of the envelope.  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
Transparency  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use  
in laser printers.  
If you need to do the printing job with a wrinkled envelopes, open the rear  
cover. And push the pressure lever on each side down.  
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
Media and tray_ 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.  
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of  
time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged  
sunlight.  
Do not print on media smaller than 76.2 mm (3 inches) wide or 127 mm  
(4 inches) long.  
In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)  
away from the edges of the material.  
Preprinted paper  
When loading preprinted paper, printed side should be facing down with an  
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn  
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.  
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn  
edges.  
Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet.  
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the  
printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out.  
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox,  
such as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780(Letter)  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser  
machines.  
Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not  
melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the  
machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature. (See "General  
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely  
affect machine rollers.  
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.  
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper,  
reducing print quality.  
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:  
-
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your  
machine’s fusing temperature. Check your machine’s specification to  
view the fusing temperature. (See "General specifications" on  
Photo  
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could  
cause damage to the machine.  
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between  
them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the  
labels, causing serious jams.  
Glossy  
-
-
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm  
of curl in any direction.  
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other  
Load one paper to the multi-purpose tray at a time, glossy side facing  
up.  
indications of separation.  
Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP  
Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.  
Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP  
Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A).  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.  
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can  
cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to  
machine components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The  
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the  
machine.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are  
wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE  
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the  
control panel. These settings will apply to copy and fax modes. For  
computer printing, select the paper size and type in the application program  
you use on your computer. (See "Paper tab" on page 55.)  
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper  
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on  
the control panel.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.  
Media and tray_ 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
7. Press OK.  
If you want to use special-sized paper-such as a billing paper, select  
Custom in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences. (See "Paper  
USING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT  
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the  
surface, and do not allow children near it.  
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will  
help the printed pages to align. Pull out the output support and expand it.  
If paper coming out of the output try has problems, such as excessive  
curl, try printing to the rear cover. The rear cover can only hold one  
piece of paper at a time, do not let the papers stack on the rear cover.  
Media and tray_ 50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.  
printing  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
This chapter includes:  
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.  
FEATURE  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
Different source for first  
page  
X
X
O
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
Watermark  
Overlay  
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection  
Number of copies  
Double-sided printing  
(duplex)a  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
a.The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.  
Some models or operating system may not support the certain  
feature(s) in the following table.  
BASIC PRINTING  
PCL printer driver  
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or  
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary  
depending on the application you use.  
FEATURE  
WINDOWS  
Machine quality option  
Poster printing  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s  
guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the  
composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check  
the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine.  
Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications .  
Multiple pages per sheet  
Fit to page printing  
Reduce and enlarge printing  
Different source for first page  
Watermark  
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see  
a warning mark,  
, or  
. An exclamation mark (  
) means  
you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and  
(
) mark means you cannot select that option due to the  
machine’s setting or environment.  
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing  
from various Windows applications.  
Overlay  
Double-sided printing (duplex)  
Macintosh basic printing. (See "Macintosh printing" on page 59.)  
Linux basic printing. (See "Linux printing" on page 60.)  
PostScript printer driver  
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP.  
Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your  
operating system or the application you are using.  
FEATURE  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
Machine quality option  
Poster printing  
O
X
O
X
O
X
1. Open the document you want to print.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.  
Multiple pages per sheet  
O
O
(2, 4)  
O
Fit to page printing  
O
O
X
X
O
O
Reduce and enlarge  
printing  
Printing_ 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type  
drop-down list.  
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.  
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.  
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the  
sheet.  
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.  
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Printing posters  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16  
sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one  
poster-size document.  
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range  
are selected within the Print window.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer  
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print  
window to change the print setting. (See "Understanding Printing  
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
Canceling a print job  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as  
follows:  
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.  
3. Select the page layout you want.  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.  
Specification of the page layout:  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4  
pages.  
Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9  
pages.  
Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16  
pages.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
2. Double-click your machine.  
3. From the Document menu, select Cancel.  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the  
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters  
or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to  
make it easier to paste the sheets together.  
machine icon (  
) in the Windows task bar.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control  
panel.  
USING SPECIAL PRINT FEATURES  
Special print features include:  
5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.  
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.  
Printing booklets  
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the  
pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a  
booklet.  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To  
print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and  
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one  
sheet.  
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4,  
Printing_ 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.  
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.  
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
9
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the  
printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the  
document first. After that , a message appears on your computer.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
8
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
Change percentage of your document  
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the  
printed page by typing in a percentage you want.  
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down  
list.  
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.  
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In  
order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the  
available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.  
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be  
automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
or  
mark).  
2. Click the Paper tab.  
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.  
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.  
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
Printing on both sides of paper  
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how  
you want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with Letter,  
Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.  
Fitting your document to a selected paper size  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper  
size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check fine details on a small document.  
Do not print on both sides of the special media, such as labels,  
envelopes, or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause  
a paper jam or damage the machine.  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
A
2. Click the Basic tab.  
3. From the Double-sided Printing section, select the binding option you  
want.  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined  
by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine.  
None  
2. Click the Paper tab.  
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in  
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page .  
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.  
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
bookbinding.  
Using watermarks  
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.  
For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading  
“DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all  
pages of a document.  
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in  
calendars.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They  
can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.  
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the  
print order when duplex printing.  
Printing_ 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead  
overlay on your document.  
Using an existing watermark  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the  
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in  
the preview image.  
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.  
Creating a new page overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing  
your logo or image.  
1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a  
new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to  
appear when printed as an overlay.  
Creating a watermark  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down  
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.  
3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can  
enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview  
window.  
3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down  
list. Edit Overlay window appears.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on  
the first page only.  
4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.  
5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the  
File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The  
default is C:\Formover.)  
4. Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font  
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from  
the Message Angle section.  
6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list.  
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the  
8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk  
Print window.  
drive.  
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark  
The overlay document size must be the same as the document  
you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a  
watermark.  
drop-down list.  
Editing a watermark  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
Using a page overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your  
document. To print an overlay with a document:  
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down  
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks  
list and change the watermark message and options.  
4. Click Update to save the changes.  
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
1. Create or open the document you want to print.  
2. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
page 55.)  
3. Click the Advanced tab.  
4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.  
5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in theText drop-down  
list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file  
you want to use.  
Deleting a watermark  
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access  
Printing Preferences. (See "Opening Printing Preferences" on  
page 55.)  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external  
source, you can also load the file when you access the Load  
Overlay window.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay  
List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the  
Overlay List box.  
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down  
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete.  
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If  
this box is checked, a message window appears each time you  
submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to  
print an overlay on your document.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the  
overlay automatically prints with your document.  
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Using overlay  
What is an overlay?  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive  
(HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.  
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather  
than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing  
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print  
a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load  
The selected overlay prints on your document.  
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that  
Printing_ 54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
of the document you will print with the overlay.  
Quality  
The available Quality options may vary depending on your machine.  
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and  
graphics. The higher setting may also increase the printing time of a  
document.  
Deleting a page overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.  
2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.  
3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.  
4. Click Delete.  
Layout Options  
This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document.  
Single Page Per Side: This option is a basic layout option. This  
5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.  
Multiple Pages Per Side: This option allows you to print several  
pages on one side of a paper. (See "Printing multiple pages on one  
Poster Printing: This option allows you to print your document into  
a poster-size document. This option prints your document into  
several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one poster-size  
Booklet Printing: This option allows you to print your document on  
both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. (See "Printing  
UNDERSTANDING PRINTING PREFERENCES  
You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing  
Preferences.  
Opening Printing Preferences  
1. Open the document you want to print.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.  
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.  
4. Click Properties or Preferences.  
Double-Sided Printing  
This option allows you to print on both sides of paper. (See "Printing on  
Basic tab  
Paper tab  
Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page.  
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications.  
Click the Basic tab to display the options shown below.  
Click the Paper tab to display the options shown below.  
Orientation  
Copies  
This option allows you to select the direction in which information is  
printed on a page.  
This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select 1 to 999 copies.  
Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,  
Paper Options  
spreadsheet style.  
This option allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.  
Rotate 180 Degrees: This option allows you to rotate the page, 180  
degrees.  
When printing on an envelope, select the Envelope tab to set the  
options.  
Printing_ 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Size: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded in  
the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.  
Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper  
tray.  
Graphics tab  
Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific  
printing needs.  
Click the Graphic tab to display the options shown below.  
Use MP Tray when printing on special materials, such as envelopes  
and transparencies.  
Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in  
the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This  
will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality  
may not be achieved.  
-
Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is  
monochrome and printing on the 60 G./m2 (16 lb) cotton paper.  
Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb) thick paper.  
-
-
-
Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.  
Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as Gilbert  
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
-
-
-
-
-
Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.  
Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.  
Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.  
Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.  
Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency  
paper.  
-
-
-
-
Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.  
CardStock: 90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.  
Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.  
Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the  
print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this  
option.  
Font/Text  
Check All Text Black box to print all the texts in your document in solid  
Advanced: This option allows you to print the first page using a  
different paper type from the rest of the document by choosing the  
tray to use for printing the first page. For example, if you want to print  
the first page using color paper, load color paper into the MP Tray,  
and plain paper into Tray 1. Then, select Tray 1. in the Source  
option and MP Tray in this Advanced option.  
black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.  
Advanced  
Download as Outline: This option allows the driver to download  
any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored  
(resident) on your machine. If, after printing a document, you find  
that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as Bit image  
and resubmit your print job. This feature is available only when you  
use the PCL printer driver.  
If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to  
the default setting.  
Download as Bit Image: This option allows the driver to download  
the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts,  
such as Korean or Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in  
this setting. Download as bit image is useful when printing from  
Adobe programs.  
Print as Graphics: This option allows the driver to download any  
fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic  
content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance  
(speed) may be enhanced in this setting.  
Scaling Options  
This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job  
on a page. This option can be grayed out according to the Layout  
Options setting in the Basic tab.  
Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the document size. (See "Fitting  
Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s  
contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in  
a percentage you want. (See "Change percentage of your  
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer  
uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your  
document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document.  
Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed  
up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to  
match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,  
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from  
those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different  
from what it looks like on the screen.  
If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to the  
default setting.  
Printing_ 56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Toner Save  
Job Settings  
This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and  
reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality.  
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by  
using the optional HDD.  
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined  
by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the printer.  
On: This option to allows the printer to use less toner on each page.  
Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document,  
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing  
without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.  
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file  
using the control panel.  
select this option.  
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file  
using the control panel.  
Advanced tab  
Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options.  
Samsung tab  
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of  
the driver. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can have  
access to following services:  
Click the Advanced tab to display the options shown below.  
Click the Samsung tab to display the options.  
Help  
This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword.  
Service  
Buy Supplies: This option allows you to order supplies on-line.  
Samsung Website: This option directly connects you to Samsung  
Website.  
Registration: This option allows you to register your machine.  
Check for updates: This option allows you to download updates for  
your printer driver.  
Using a favorite setting  
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for  
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future  
use.  
To save a Presets item:  
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.  
Watermark  
This option allows you to print text over an existing document. (See  
Overlay  
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. (See  
Output options  
This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will print.  
Select the print order from the drop-down list.  
Normal: This option allows you to print all pages from the first page  
to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages: This option allows you to print all pages from  
the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: This option allows you to print only the odd  
numbered pages of the document.  
Print Even Pages: This option allows you to print only the even  
numbered pages of the document.  
Advanced: This option allows you to set advanced output options  
for printing, such as printing an information page, and saving as a  
form to later use as an overlay.  
If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to the  
default setting.  
Printing_ 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3. Click Save. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are  
Using the shortcut icon  
1. Select the PDF file you wish to print, drag and drop it to the Direct  
Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top. The selected PDF file is  
sent to the default machine.  
saved.  
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The  
machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.  
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click  
Delete.  
If the default machine does not support Direct Printing Utility, the  
message window alerting you to select the appropriate machine  
opens. Select the appropriate machine in the Select Printer  
section.  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting  
Default Printer from the Presets drop down list.  
2. Customize the machine settings for your needs.  
Using help  
3. Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
Click  
from the upper-right corner of the window, and then click on any  
option. The help screen gives detailed information about the printing  
features provided by the printer driver.  
Using the right-click menu  
1. Right-click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.  
USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY  
2. Select the machine you wish to use.  
This chapter explains how to use the Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files  
without having to open the files.  
3. Customize the machine settings for your needs.  
4. Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
HDD should be installed on your machine, to print PDF files using  
this program.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT PRINT SETTINGS  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print. Deactivate  
the printing restriction feature, and retry printing.  
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password.  
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing  
Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created.  
The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version  
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print  
it.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
2. Select your machine.  
3. Right-click on the machine driver icon and select  
What is Direct Printing Utility?  
Printing Preferences.  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your  
machine to print without having to open the file. It sends data through the  
Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF  
format.  
4. Change the settings on each tab.  
5. Click OK.  
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in  
Printing Preferences.  
To install this program, select Custom installation and put a check mark in  
this program when you install the printer driver.  
SETTING YOUR MACHINE AS A DEFAULT  
MACHINE  
Printing  
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
From the Direct Printing Utility window  
1. From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Direct  
Printing Utility > Direct Printing Utility.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your  
desktop.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.  
2. Select your machine.  
2. Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click  
3. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.  
Browse.  
3. Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open.  
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.  
4. Customize the machine settings for your needs.  
5. Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
PRINTING TO A FILE (PRN)  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.  
To create a file:  
Printing_ 58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.  
The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh  
OS version.  
Layout  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears  
on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.  
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the  
following features.  
2. Select the folder, assign a name to the file, and then click Print.  
MACINTOSH PRINTING  
This section explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print  
environment before printing.  
Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be  
Network connected (See "Macintosh" on page 40.)  
Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing  
direction on a page similar to the examples on UI.  
Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page  
on the sheet.  
Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides of a  
Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper  
180 degrees.  
Printing a document  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver  
setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a  
Macintosh:  
1. Open the document you want to print.  
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some  
applications).  
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make  
Graphics  
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.  
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select  
Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the  
graphic features.  
Resolution: This option allows you to select the printing resolution.  
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters  
and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes  
to print a document.  
4. Open the File menu and click Print.  
5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you  
want to print.  
6. Click Print.  
Paper  
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If  
Changing printer settings  
You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.  
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine  
name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending  
on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer  
properties window is similar to the following.  
Printing_ 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper  
type.  
Printing on both sides of paper  
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode,  
decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The  
binding options are, as follows:  
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.  
1. From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.  
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.  
3. Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option.  
4. Select the other options you want to use.  
5. Click Print and; the machine prints on both sides of the paper.  
Printer Features  
Printer Features tab provides Reverse Duplex Printing and Fit to  
Page options. Select Printer Features from the drop-down list under  
Orientation to access the following features.  
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy  
might print on same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of  
paper when you are printing more than 1 copy.  
Reverse Duplex Printing: This option allows you to select general  
print order compared to duplex print order. If this option does not  
appear, your machine does not have this feature.  
Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be  
useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.  
LINUX PRINTING  
Printing from applications  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature  
provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common  
UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any  
such application.  
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu  
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.  
2. Select Print directly using lpr.  
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages  
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print  
on one sheet of paper.  
3. Select the other options you want to use.  
4. Click Print, then machine prints the selected number of pages you want  
to print on one sheet of paper.  
Printing_ 60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from  
Printing files  
the printer list and click Properties.  
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the  
standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS  
lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the  
standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1. Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press  
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print  
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click  
Open.  
2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change  
the print job properties.  
3. Click OK to start printing.  
Configuring Printer Properties  
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as  
a printer.  
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
the top of the window.  
2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.  
3. The Printer Properties window opens.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: This option allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in  
Printers configuration.  
General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex  
feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of  
pages per sheet.  
Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa  
while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.  
Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing image files, such as color options, image size, or  
image position.  
Driver: This option allows you to view or select another machine  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options.  
Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check  
box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click  
Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected  
class.  
Device: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.  
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your  
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties  
print job.  
window.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel.  
PRINTING WITH PS DRIVER  
PS printer driver is provided on the supplied software CD.  
Printing_ 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
If you select Typical installation for a local printer or Typical installation  
for a network printer when installing machine’s driver, PS driver will  
Layout tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears  
on the printed page.  
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it. (See  
1. Open the document you want to print.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. It may look  
slightly different depending on your application.  
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These  
settings include the number of copies and print range.  
Orientation  
This option allows you to select the direction in which the information is  
printed on a page.  
Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,  
spreadsheet style.  
Rotate Landscape: This option allows you to rotate the page, 180  
degrees.  
3. Select your machine’s PS driver from the Select Printer list.  
Print on Both Sides  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing, decide  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer  
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print  
window to change the print setting. (See "Understanding PS  
how you want your document oriented.  
None  
Flip on Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in  
bookbinding.  
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
Understanding PS driver’s Printing Preferences  
Opening Printing Preferences  
1. Open the document you want to print.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.  
3. Select your machine’s PS driver from the Select Printer.  
4. Click Properties or Preferences.  
Flip on Short Edge: This option is the type often used with  
calendars.  
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or  
thick papers. It may result in paper jam and damage to the  
machine.  
Pages Per Sheet  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.  
To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size  
and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on  
one sheet.  
Printing_ 62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced  
You can select Paper Size, Graphic, and Document Options.  
Paper/Output: This option allows you to choose paper size you  
want to use.  
Graphic: This option allows you to select printing quality options.  
Document Options: This option allows you to select options such  
as PostScript Options and, Printer Features.  
Paper/Quality tab  
You can select paper tray and media type.  
Paper Source: This option allows you to choose which tray to use.  
Media: This option allows you to choose which media to use.  
Printing_ 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.  
copying  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.  
This chapter includes:  
Advanced tab  
UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN  
When you press Copy on the main screen, the Copy screen appears which  
has several tabs and lots of copying options. All the options are grouped by  
features so that you can configure your selections easily.  
If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the main screen.  
Basic tab  
ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature is  
helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card. (See "ID  
N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of  
Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See "Poster  
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original document  
on a single page. (See "Clone copying" on page 67.)  
Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book copying"  
Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or  
2-sided originals. (See "Booklet copying" on page 68.)  
Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken  
from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 68.)  
Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between  
transparencies within a set. (See "Transparency copying" on page 68.)  
Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Selecting the size  
Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.  
Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.  
Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options.  
Original Type: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  
type for the current copy job. (See "Selecting the type of originals" on  
page 66.)  
Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier  
to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark images. (See  
Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.  
Copying_ 64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Image tab  
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or  
you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the  
control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY  
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before  
starting to copy.  
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the  
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current  
copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after  
certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press  
the Clear All button on the control panel.  
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See  
Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and fold  
creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing edges"  
Selecting the size of originals  
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the  
original size.  
Erase Background: Prints an image with no background. (See  
Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See "Shifting  
Press more to see the detail values.  
Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the cardinal  
point arrows to set the size.  
Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option  
supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, A4, or A5 sized. If the  
originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original  
size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.  
BASIC COPY  
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.  
1. Press Copy from the main screen.  
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter and  
Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized  
paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3 pages,  
1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized paper, and  
3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine prints the output first  
letter, legal, and letter in order from several trays.  
2. Place originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or you can use the  
scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the  
scanner lid.  
Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used  
values.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce  
or enlarge an image on the paper.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
Original (100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.  
Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the  
output paper.  
Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used  
values.  
The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is  
placed. In the document feeder, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And  
in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.  
3. If necessary, adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size,  
Reduce/Enlarge, Duplex and more. (See "Changing the default copy  
Copying on both sides of originals  
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex  
value.  
4. Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.  
5. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more  
than two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the  
first page copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts  
copying the rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in  
order. Because the default value of the Output option is Collated.  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides  
of original, the message Another Page? appears after the first page  
copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side facing down and  
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your  
Copying_ 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
original.  
degree.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of  
the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from  
originals.  
Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out  
order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of originals first,  
which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a  
paper.  
1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides  
of the paper.  
Deciding the form of copy output  
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated  
or Uncollated.  
1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and prints  
on both sides of the paper. But, the information on the back side of the  
print out is rotated 180°.  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides  
of original, the message Another Page? appears after the first page  
copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side facing down and  
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your  
original.  
2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one  
on a separate sheet.  
Press more to see the values.  
Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.  
2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides  
of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the  
originals.  
Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.  
2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and prints  
each one on a separate sheet. But, the information on the back side of  
the printout is rotated 180°.  
Selecting the type of originals  
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.  
Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both sides of  
a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals.  
The machine prints the second original first, which means the firstly  
input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For instance, if you  
print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered pages of originals  
will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every odd numbered  
pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper.  
Changing the darkness  
Press the Basic tab and this defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right  
arrows to change the level of light and dark in the printouts.  
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES  
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select  
specific copy features.  
Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Sided 2: Scans originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out  
order of the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which  
means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For  
instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered  
pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every  
odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a  
paper. The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180  
Copying_ 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.  
2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.  
4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.  
ID card copying  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper  
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.  
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business  
card.  
6. Press Start on the control panel.  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the  
N-Up feature.  
Poster copying  
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages  
together to make one poster-sized document.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the  
scanner glass.  
The size of the 2-sided originals should be smaller than A5, if not,  
some of it won’t be copied.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass  
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the  
scanner lid. (See "Loading originals" on page 44.)  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.  
5. Press Start on the control panel.  
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are  
selected as below;  
6. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows  
Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
Reduce/Enlarge to Original (100%)  
Paper Supply to Tray  
indicate as shown then, close the scanner lid.  
5. Press On to activate this feature.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned  
and printed one by one in the following order:  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may  
not be printed.  
If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1  
Sided, the Output option to Collated.  
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)  
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages  
onto one sheet of paper.  
Clone copying  
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number  
of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper  
size.  
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the  
document feeder.  
1
3
2
4
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. (See "Loading  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.  
5. Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the  
scanner lid. (See "Loading originals" on page 44.)  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
Copying_ 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
option.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.  
1 Sided Original: Copies on one side of originals.  
2 Sided Original: Copies on both sides of originals.  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are  
selected as below;  
6. Press OK.  
Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
Reduce/Enlarge to Original (100%)  
Paper Supply to Tray.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS  
B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.  
5. Press On to activate this feature.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Cover copying  
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken  
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the  
main body of the job.  
Book copying  
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid  
until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If  
the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with  
the scanner lid open.  
1. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass and close the scanner lid. (See  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Covers.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot  
use this feature.  
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
option.  
1. Place the originals face down on the scanner glass and close the  
Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front,  
back, or both.  
Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or  
blank paper.  
Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is  
loaded.  
scanner lid.. (See "Loading originals" on page 44.)  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Edge  
Erase > Book Center and Edges Erase.  
3. Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.  
6. Press OK.  
4. Select the appropriate option.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Left Page: Prints left page of the book.  
Right Page: Prints right page of the book.  
Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.  
Transparency copying  
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy  
the information.  
5. Press OK.  
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and  
Paper Size to Transparency. (See "Setting the paper size and type"  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Booklet copying  
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which  
are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct  
sequence.  
1. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on  
page 44.)  
2. Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.  
3. Set the paper type to Transparency.  
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each  
image to fit on the selected paper.  
4. Press Copy from the main screen.  
5. Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.  
6. Select Transparencies option.  
No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between  
transparencies.  
1. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass and close the scanner lid. (See  
Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.  
Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as  
printed on the transparency.  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.  
7. Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or  
Printed Sheet.  
Copying_ 68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8. Press OK.  
Shifting margins  
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.  
9. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Erasing edges  
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.  
1. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass and close the scanner lid. (See  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the  
scanner lid. Or load the originals face up in the document feeder. (See  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Margin Shift.  
4. Select Margin Shift option.  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Edge Erase.  
4. Select the appropriate option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto Center: Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The  
original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.  
Small Original Erase: Erases 6 mm (0.25 inches) from the edge of  
the copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use  
this feature.  
Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of  
the copies.  
Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or  
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature  
only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on  
page 68.)  
Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and  
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the  
scanner glass or in the document feeder.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS  
If you want to copy always in the same setting, adjust the default copy  
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book  
Center and Edge Erase.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Erasing background images  
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the  
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.  
1. Load the originals, face up, in the document feeder. Or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass and close the scanner lid. (See  
2. Press Copy from the main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Background.  
4. Select the appropriate option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background  
is.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Copying_ 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8.  
scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.  
This chapter includes:  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not  
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced  
resolution.  
UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN  
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the main screen. If the screen  
displays another menu, press (  
) to go to the main screen.  
BASIC SCANNING METHOD  
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the  
network.  
Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the  
originals and scan them from the control panel. Then, the scanned data  
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When  
you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan  
Manager is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature  
can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning  
an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or  
the network connection. (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software"  
SmarThru Office : This program is the accompanying software for your  
machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This  
feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection.  
If the message asking Auth.ID, Password, and Realm Name, it  
means the network administrator has set the authentication in  
SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on  
page 99.)  
Press Scan to Email, Scan to PC or Scan to Server.  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature,  
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB  
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment. (See  
page 72.)  
FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See  
page 74.)  
SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB  
Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination  
Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to your PC. (See  
page 73.)  
Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination with SMB and FTP. (See "Scanning originals and sending  
Basic tab  
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email, Scan to PC and  
Scan to Server’s basic screen.  
Scanning_ 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Scan to Email  
Scan to Server  
SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB.  
FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP.  
From: Sender's email address.  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc (carbon copy) is for copies  
to an additional recipient and Bcc (blind carbon copy) is for the same  
as Cc but the recipient's name is not displayed.  
Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.  
Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.  
Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored  
addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your  
computer to the machine using the SyncThru™ Web Service. (See  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
No.: Index number, which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Server: Alias name, which you entered in "Scanning originals and  
Web Service.  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Advanced tab  
Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication  
is enabled, the log off confirmation message pops up and closes  
Scan to Email.  
Scan to PC  
Original Size: Selects the size of originals.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Image tab  
If the authentication for network appears, you have to select ID and type  
in Password to enter the Scan to PC screen.  
No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.  
Application: Shows the available application programs from your  
computer.  
Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.  
Logout: Logout from the Scan to PC screen.  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See  
Scanning_ 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
a check mark of SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP  
Authentication.  
a) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
b) Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port  
number is 25.  
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original  
is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode. (See "Color  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 77.)  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as  
an email attachment  
1. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
Output tab  
2. Press Scan from the main screen.  
If the authentication message shows, enter Auth. ID, Password  
and Realm Name. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web  
page 74.)  
Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See "Quality"  
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options, such as file  
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each specific  
purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 78.)  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
3. Press Scan to Email.  
4. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See  
5. Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.  
From: Touch From. The keyboard pops up on the screen. Use the  
pop up keyboard to enter your email addresses. Or you can use  
Local and Global to enter the addresses easily. (See "Global" on  
page 73.)  
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING  
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)  
To/Cc/Bcc: Enter recipient's email address manually with the pop  
up keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global  
addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the  
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on  
page 73.)  
Subject: Title of email.  
Message: The contents of the email. The maximum size is 1KB.  
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several  
destinations from the machine by email.  
Setting up an email account  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up  
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.  
6. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.  
4. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed either on one  
side only, or on both sides.  
Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right  
arrows.  
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 25.  
7. Press the Start button to scan and send the file.  
7. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
authentication.  
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot use the machine to  
copy or to send a fax.  
8. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
9. Click Apply.  
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP, put  
Scanning_ 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
operating systems.  
Storing email addresses  
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory  
and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are  
stored. Local means email addresses are stored in the machine's memory,  
and Global means email addresses are stored in a specified (LDAP) server.  
Entering email addresses by the address book  
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address  
book, you can enter email addresses singly, as follows:  
1. Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.  
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store email  
addresses from your computer.  
2. Press the first alphabet of the address you are looking for.  
Or press Search to type in the full email address and press OK.  
When the search is completed, screen displays the search results.  
3. Press From and select the email address you want from the email  
list and press Apply.  
Storing on your local machine  
This method means that you store email addresses on your machine’s  
memory. You can add addresses, as well as group them in particular  
catagories.  
Do the same to enter To, Cc or Bcc.  
4. Press OK.  
Individual  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Entering email addresses by the keyboard  
When you press the input field for From, To, Cc, or Message, the  
keyboard shows on the display screen.  
4. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address  
Book. The screen shows Individual Address Book on the right  
side of the screen.  
The following procedure is an example of entering "[email protected]".  
1. Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.  
2. Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.  
3. Press @.  
4. Press a, b, c.  
5. Click Add.  
6. When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,  
enter User Name and E-mail Address.  
7. Click Apply.  
5. Press. and press c, o, m.  
8. To check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your  
To enter contents in other fields, press left/right arrow on the  
upper left of the keyboard.  
machine, press Local and select Individual using the left/rigt arrow.  
9. Press the first alphabet of the address you are looking for.  
Or press Search to type in the full email address and press OK.  
When the search is completed, screen displays the search results.  
6. Press OK after entering all the contents.  
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING TO  
YOUR COMPUTER (SCAN TO PC)  
Group  
1. Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.  
2. Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.  
3. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.  
You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan Manager  
program that is installed in your networked computer.  
Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.  
4. Click Add.  
For USB connected machine  
This is a basic scanning method for usb connected machine.  
5. Select the Group number and enter Group Name.  
6. Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.  
7. Click Apply.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
8. To check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
machine, press Local and select Group using the left/rigt arrow.  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
9. Press the first alphabet of the address you are looking for.  
Or press Search to type in the full email address and press OK.  
When the search is completed, screen displays the search results.  
3. Press Scan from the main screen.  
4. Press Scan to PC.  
Global  
5. Make sure Local PC is shown.  
Email addresses stored in Global in your machine are processed by the  
LDAP server.  
If necessary, press the right arrow to toggle from Network PC to Local  
PC.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
6. Press Login.  
7. Select an application from the application list and press Select.  
8. Press the Start button on the control panel to start scanning.  
9. The original will be scanned and sent to your computer.  
4. Click Machine Settings > LDAP Server Setup. Then the LDAP  
Server screen shows on the right side.  
5. Select IP Address or Host Name and enter LDAP server and Port.  
6. Enter optional information.  
7. Click Apply.  
For network connected machine  
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software  
CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program. (See "Installing  
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.  
The method of storing varies depending on the server and the  
Scanning_ 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
1. Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a  
14. Click Apply.  
network and Samsung Scan Manager is installed on the computer.  
Setting up an SMB server  
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to SMB  
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
3. Press Scan from the main screen.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
4. Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List.  
5. Click Add.  
If the authentication message shows, enter Auth. ID, Password  
and Realm Name. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web  
page 74.)  
4. Press Scan to PC.  
6. Select the Index number, from 1 to 20.  
5. Make sure Network PC is shown.  
7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup. This name will be displayed on  
If neccessary, press the right arrow to toggle from Local PC to Network  
your machine.  
PC.  
8. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
6. Select ID and enter Password, which you have set from the Samsung  
9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
Scan Manager.  
7. Press Login.  
8. Select one from the application list and press Select.  
9. Select the scanning setting, such as the resolution or original size.  
10. Press Start on the control panel to start scanning.  
11. The original will be scanned and sent to your computer.  
11. Enter the Share name of the server.  
12. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized  
persons to access the SMB server.  
This box is unchecked by default.  
13. Enter the User Name and User Password.  
14. Enter the User Domain.  
You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the scan  
settings from the Samsung Scan Manager window. Click Properties  
and set the options in each tab. (See "Using Samsung Scan Manager"  
15. Enter the Scan File Folder for storing the scanned image.  
Example: C://Documenets and settings/user/FTP server  
16. Click Apply.  
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA  
SMB/FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)  
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server  
1. Press Scan from the main screen.  
You can scan an image and send it to a total of five destinations via the  
SMB or FTP.  
If the authentication message shows, enter Auth. ID, Password  
and Realm Name. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web  
page 74.)  
Setting up an FTP server  
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP  
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
4. Click Machine Settings > FTP Setup > Server List.  
5. Click Add.  
2. Press Scan to Server.  
3. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
4. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
5. Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.  
6. Select the destination SMB server from the server list.  
6. Select the Index number, from 1 to 20.  
7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup. This name will be displayed on  
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP  
servers.  
your machine.  
8. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
7. Press Start on the control panel.  
9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 21.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the  
specified server.  
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to permit  
SETTING AUTHENTICATION FOR AUTHORIZED  
USER  
access to unauthorized people.  
This box is unchecked by default.  
12. Enter the Login Name and Login Password.  
13. Enter the Scan File Folder for saving the scanned image.  
Example: C://Documenets and settings/user/FTP server  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network  
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.  
Scanning_ 74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To send a scanned image through email or via network server safely, you  
must register account information of authorized users to your local machine  
or to the network server using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
7. Click Apply.  
SMB  
If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users or  
on the server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data to the  
network (email, FTP, SMB).  
For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must register  
the network or local authentication configuration using the SyncThru™  
Web Service.  
1. Select SMB.  
2. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
User authentication has 3 options: No Authentication (Default),  
Require Network Authentication, and Require Local Authentication.  
6. User can add a backup domain as in the previous step.  
7. Click Apply.  
Registering local authorized users  
User can add up to 6 optional domains.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
4. Click Machine Settings > User Authentication.  
5. Select Require Local Authentication in the Setup section.  
LDAP  
1. Select LDAP.  
2. Click Apply.  
3. Click OK in the modifying confirmation pop-up window.  
4. Click LDAP Server Setup in the left pane.  
5. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
6. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
7. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
If you have not set Default[From:] Address in SMTP Client  
Setup, the notifying pop-up window appears. Click OK to browse  
the Web page where you can set the default email address.  
6. Click Apply.  
7. Click OK in the modifying confirmation pop-up window.  
8. Select Local Authentication in the left pane.  
9. Click Add.  
8. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
9. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.  
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login  
ID (Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).  
10. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the  
entry, from 1 to 50.  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in  
SWS.  
11. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone number.  
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine  
when you start scanning to email from the control panel.  
10. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.  
11. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute  
12. Click Apply.  
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).  
12. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search  
Register network authorized users  
results and search timeout.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the  
LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP  
server has a referral server.  
4. Click Machine Settings > User Authentication.  
13. Select Search Name Order that you desire.  
14. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.  
5. Select Require Network Authentication in the Setup section.  
If you have not set Default[From:] Address in SMTP Client  
Setup, the notifying popup window appears. Click OK to browse  
the web page where you can set the default email address.  
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You  
may check this option if you want to search for information in a  
default email address group.  
6. Click Apply.  
7. Click OK in the modifying confirmation popup window.  
8. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.  
Configure the values for each feature, as follows:  
15. Click Apply.  
USING SAMSUNG SCAN MANAGER  
Kerberos  
1. Select Kerberos.  
If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program  
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about  
this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through  
this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders  
where scanned documents are saved in your computer.  
2. Enter the Default Realm used for Kerberos login.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 88.  
The Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the  
Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, See  
6. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
Scanning_ 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan Manager.  
Change Port tab  
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the Smart  
Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan Manager.  
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager  
window.  
3. Press Properties.  
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination  
and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.  
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab.  
(Local or Network)  
5. When setting is done, press OK.  
Set Scan Button tab  
Local Scanner  
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.  
Network Scanner  
Select when your machine is connected via network port.  
Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your  
machine.  
IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your  
machine.  
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS  
This section explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The settings you change will be maintained for a certain time, but  
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
Scan Destination  
Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently  
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program  
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel  
Destination List.  
Duplex  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned  
are two sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side or  
both sides of the paper.  
Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to  
open scanned image.  
Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to  
Available Destination List,  
Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the  
user in the Available Destination List.  
File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be  
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides, but  
the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
Scan Property  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, load the originals on the  
document feeder. If the machine cannot detect the original on the  
document feeder, it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.  
Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.  
Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default  
saving folder.  
Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.  
Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.  
Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.  
ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does  
not support this option, it will be grayed out.  
Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied  
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.  
Default: Allows you to go back to default options.  
Resolution  
You can adjust document resolution.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The  
higher value you select, clearer the result. But the scanning time may take  
longer.  
100 dpi, 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only when Color Mode  
is set to Color or Gray.  
Scanning_ 76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Erase: Lightens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values.  
RESOLUTION  
(DPI)  
FEATURE  
FILE FORMAT  
Darkness  
Scan to Email  
100, 200, 300, 400, PDF, Single-Page TIFF,  
600 Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output  
darker.  
Scan to PC  
100, 200, 300, 400, PDF, TIFF, JPEG  
600  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree ,  
then press OK.  
Scan to Server  
100, 200, 300, 400, PDF, Single-Page TIFF,  
600  
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Original Size  
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the  
pre-defined size, putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option to  
Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate option and press  
OK.  
From the main screen, press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or  
Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/down arrows  
to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Off: Sets this option off.  
Auto: Automatically adjusts background brightness.  
Enhance: Darkens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values. The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Erase: Lightens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values. The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Scan to Edge  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially  
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you  
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not  
need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Color Mode  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color Mode.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On and press OK.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Color. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Quality  
Color: Displays an image in color. 24 bits per pixel.  
Gray: Displays an image in gray. 8 bits per pixel.  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. The higher the  
quality you select, the larger the file size.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Output tab > Quality.  
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
File Format  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Output tab > File Format.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if  
Mono has been selected for Color Mode.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
BMP: Scans original in BMP format.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Image tab > Erase Background. Select On and press OK.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if  
Mono has been selected for Color Mode.  
Off: Sets this option off.  
Auto: Automatically adjusts background brightness.  
Enhance: Darkens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values.  
Scanning_ 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose  
Scan Preset  
one of the options on screen.  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.  
10. Click Next.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (or Scan to PC or Scan to Server) > the  
Output tab >Scan Preset.  
11. Click Finish.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality  
documents.  
High Quality Printing: Produces a high quality output with the largest  
file size.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size  
of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the  
highest quality images.  
Windows Vista  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size  
of output is small.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
Scanners and Cameras.  
4. Double click Scan a document or picture. Windows Fax and Scan  
application appears.  
You can click on View scanners and cameras to view  
scanners,  
If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint  
program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera... .  
SCANNING WITH TWAIN-ENABLED SOFTWARE  
If you want to scan documents using other softwares, you will need to use  
TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.  
5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.  
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:  
6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your  
preferences affect the picture.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
7. Click Scan.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the  
Scanner and Camera Wizard.  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
3. Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.  
4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
5. Scan and save your scanned image.  
MACINTOSH SCANNING  
You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Macintosh OS  
offers Image Capture program.  
SCANNING USING THE WIA DRIVER  
Scanning with USB  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for  
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by  
Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike  
the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust  
images without using additional software.  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with a USB port.  
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
If No Image Capture device connected message appears,  
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem  
continues,refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
Windows XP  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
4. Set the scan options on this program.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
5. Scan and save your scanned image.  
For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the  
Image Capture’s help.  
3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel, > Scanners and Cameras.  
Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.  
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to  
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X  
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
4. Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera  
Wizard appears.  
5. Click Next.  
6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click  
Preview to see how your options affect the picture.  
7. Click Next.  
8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the  
picture.  
Scanning_ 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
3. Select the scanner on the list.  
Scanning with network  
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered  
on.  
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder , or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
4. Click Devices and click Browse Devices.  
5. For Mac OS X 10.4:  
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use  
TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click Connect.  
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port.  
If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port..  
to select port.  
Refer to Scan Manager for Change port.. use. (See "Setting  
If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer  
and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically  
selected.  
For Mac OS X 10.5:  
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in  
Bonjour Devices.  
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps  
above.  
If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can  
select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is  
in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set  
the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.  
6. Set the scan options on this program.  
4. Click Properties.  
7. Scan and save your scanned image.  
5. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
For more information about using Image Capture,refer to the  
Image Capture’s help.  
6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.  
Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.  
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to  
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X  
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the  
Preview Pane.  
Setting scan information in Scan Manager  
To find out about Scan Manager program information, to check the  
installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings. and to add or  
delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in  
Scan Manager program, follow these instructions:  
1. From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan Manager.  
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager .  
3. Press Properties.  
4. Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings,  
to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can  
change the scanning machine by using Change port. (Local or  
Network)  
5. When done, press OK.  
LINUX SCANNING  
7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.  
Pane.  
8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.  
Scanning  
Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.  
Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.  
2. Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the  
option from the Job Type drop-down list. (See "Adding Job Type  
Scanning_ 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options.  
9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
TOOLS  
NAME  
Save  
FUNCTION  
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the  
progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.  
Saves the image.  
10. The scanned image appears.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. (See "Using the  
Undo  
Redo  
Cancels your last action.  
11. When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the  
file name.  
13. Click Save.  
Scroll  
Crop  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings for later use.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
Zoom Out Zooms the image out.  
1. Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
2. Click Save As.  
3. Enter the name for your setting.  
4. Click OK.  
Zoom In  
Scale  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale  
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.  
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
1. Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.  
2. The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved  
Rotate  
Flip  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select  
the number of degrees from the drop-down list.  
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
To delete a Job Type setting  
1. Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down  
list.  
Effect  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of  
the image, or to invert the image.  
2. Click Delete.  
The setting is deleted from the list  
Properties Shows the properties of the image.  
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and  
tools to edit your scanned image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on  
screen help.  
Use the following tools to edit the image:  
Scanning_ 80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9.  
faxing  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.  
This chapter includes:  
We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services  
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting  
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,  
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the  
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals  
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL  
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet  
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN  
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the main screen. If the screen displays  
an other menu, press  
to go to the main screen.  
1 Line port  
2 Micro filter  
3 DSL modem / Telephone line  
To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the  
control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax  
Basic tab  
PREPARING TO FAX  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord  
to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.  
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to  
another.  
Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using the  
number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone book,  
press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax phone book" on  
page 85.)  
Add No: Lets you add more destinations.:  
: Deletes the last digit entered.  
Faxing_ 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Image tab  
: Removes all digits of the selected entry.  
Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.  
Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.  
Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your  
machine or from SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Setting up a fax phone  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the  
original, both sides of the original.  
Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.  
Advanced tab  
Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the  
original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 85.)  
Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See  
Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as  
in newspaper originals. (See "Erase Background" on page 85.)  
Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color.  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
SENDING A FAX  
Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to  
update current setting.  
Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without your  
Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations. (See  
Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed  
remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the polling  
function, the originals must be previously stored in the machine. (See  
This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of  
transmission.  
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder  
or the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 44.) If the  
originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner  
glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first,  
which has higher priority in scanning.  
Setting the fax header  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  
any fax you send.  
Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine  
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the  
same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each  
mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax.  
4. Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.  
5. Press OK.  
Faxing_ 82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
Sending a fax  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
6. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/Pause  
button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a  
fax number.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder.  
7. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax  
machine.  
Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See  
Resending Automatically  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine automatically redials the number.  
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial  
attempts, follow the steps below:  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
page 41.)  
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2  
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press Redial.  
Select Redaial Term and Redial Times.  
5. Press OK.  
5. When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using  
the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right  
side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.  
To add a number, press Add No.  
6. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a  
Redialing the last number  
fax to destinations.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
If you want to send fax directly from your computer, use SmarThru  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine  
start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the  
job you want to delete, press Delete.  
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message  
asking to place another page.  
While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at  
2. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
3. Place the originals face up into the document feeder.  
4. Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent  
fax numbers.  
5. Select a fax number in the list and press OK.  
The machine automatically begins to send.  
Delaying a fax transmission  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present.  
Sending a fax manually  
This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.  
Press On.  
2. Place the originals face up into the document feeder.  
5. Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time  
with left/right arrows.  
If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as  
'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.  
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You  
can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than  
the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the  
time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning  
message will appear machine resets it to the current time.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
6. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.  
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.  
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2  
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.  
Faxing_ 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5. Press OK.  
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any  
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job  
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved  
in memory.  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data  
stored in the memory.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side to move down.  
5. Press Send Batch.  
Receiving manually in Telephone mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine  
begins receiving a fax.  
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax  
mode  
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 28.)  
6. Press On.  
7. Press OK.  
When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay  
fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to  
reserved delay fax.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message  
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
Sending a priority fax  
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately  
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority  
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between  
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before  
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.  
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to  
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after  
a predefined number of rings.  
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set  
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is  
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering  
machine. otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering  
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.  
5. Press On.  
Receiving faxes manually using an extension  
telephone  
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive  
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without  
going to the fax machine.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start to start the urgent fax job.  
RECEIVING A FAX  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press  
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.  
This part explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods  
available.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the  
remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.  
Changing the receive modes  
To change the *9* to, for example, *3*, follow the steps below:  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,  
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to  
another mode, follow the steps below:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
page 41.)  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.  
4. Select On.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
page 41.)  
5. Press left/right arrows to display number 3.  
6. Press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.  
4. Select the option.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then  
Start.  
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the  
fax reception mode.  
Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine  
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,  
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the  
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically  
switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. To print the received fax  
data, enter passcode you have set for this feature.  
Faxing_ 84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Resolution  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
page 41.)  
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received  
document.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
value.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.  
4. Select On.  
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will  
reduce the transmission time.  
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small characters,  
thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix machine.  
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine  
detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports  
a Super Fine resolution.  
5. Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the  
control panel.  
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the  
received fax will be printed out.  
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper  
Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the received  
fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.  
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The  
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
page 41.)  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option  
on the screen and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Received Fax Printing > Duplex.  
Select appropriate option.  
Text: For originals with text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.  
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding will  
be the long edge.  
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding will  
be the short edge.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
4. Press OK.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance  
the darkness degree and press OK.  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you  
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or  
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon  
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Press Erase to activate  
this function. Select Level and press OK.  
ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS  
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.  
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as  
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this  
section.  
Color Mode  
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only  
applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to  
change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin  
Setting > the General tab > Default Settings. (See "General  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.  
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.  
Color: Transmits a fax in color.  
Duplex  
Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.  
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select  
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.  
Load the originals onto the document feeder to use this function.  
SETTING UP A FAX PHONE BOOK  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
value.  
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission  
settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.  
1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.  
Individual: Stores up to 200 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which  
are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..  
Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to  
several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.  
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list  
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of  
Faxing_ 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
many Individual entries.  
6. Enter Index, Name and Phone Number. Index you enter here will be  
the Speed Dial No. in the display screen of your machine.  
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)  
7. Press Apply.  
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.  
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.  
Edit: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..  
New: Creates the new Speed Dial No..  
Delete: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..  
Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in  
Individual phone book. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.  
USING THE POLLING OPTION  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a  
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not  
in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the  
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the  
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the  
original.  
Detail: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is  
page 86.)  
Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number  
list in the Basic tab.  
Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.  
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the  
polling feature.  
2. Press New.  
The polling process is as follows:  
3. Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up  
keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number  
keypad on the control panel.  
1. Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals  
ID: Enters the name.  
Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
2. Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.  
3. Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when  
Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area  
code if necessary.  
Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.  
4. Press OK.  
Storing the originals for polling  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)  
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.  
2. Press New.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or you can use the  
scanner glass with a single original document, face down.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
3. Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.  
the name.  
5. Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The  
four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not  
want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store,  
delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.  
Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.  
Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.  
Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
If you want to use the Mailbox, Store the originals in the Mailbox.  
4. Press OK.  
5. Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step  
6. Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will  
be remained in the machine’s memory even after the fax transmition. If  
you select On, the fax data will be deleted after completes.  
until you added entries you need.  
Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane, group  
list.  
7. Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.  
6. Press OK to save the numbers.  
8. Give the Passcode to the receiver.  
Setting up a fax phone book using SyncThru™ Web  
Service  
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer  
using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Printing (Deleting) the polling document  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).  
3. Enter Passcode.  
1. Open the web browser in your computer.  
4. Press OK.  
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service  
shows. (Example. http://123.123.123.123)  
Polling a remote fax  
3. Press Machine Settings > Fax Setup > Fax Phone Book.  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote  
machine.  
4. Select Speed Dial (Individual).  
Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial (Individual) can be  
used when selecting.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.  
5. Press Add.  
Faxing_ 86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific  
time within 24 hours.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or you can use the  
scanner glass with a single original document faced down.  
3. Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on  
the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with  
the remote fax machine.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.  
4. Press OK.  
5. Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode. (See "Creating Mailbox" on  
page 87.)  
Polling from a remote Mailbox  
6. Press OK.  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox  
of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of  
Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using mailbox" on  
page 87.)  
Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox  
a) Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete.  
b) Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the  
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
Printing a Mailbox  
a) Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print.  
b) Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.  
3. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are  
filled with information from the sender.  
Faxing to a remote Mailbox  
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you  
can use the Send to Remote feature.  
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the  
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.  
4. Press OK  
1. Press Fax from the main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or you can use the  
scanner glass with a single original document face down.  
USING MAILBOX  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the  
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to  
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the  
Mailbox must be created.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.  
5. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are  
filled with information from the receiver.  
6. Press OK.  
Creating Mailbox  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the  
page 41.)  
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is  
successfully completed or not.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See  
4. Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.  
5. Press Mailbox Setup.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
6. Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.  
7. Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.  
8. Press Edit Mailbox.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
3. Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.  
9. Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.  
Up to 20 numbers you can enter.  
4. Press On.  
10. Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet  
5. Press OK.  
or number up to 20 digits.  
11. Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME  
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine  
does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing,  
deleting, printing, receiving.  
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone  
fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in  
machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.  
12. Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
received into Mailbox.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
13. Press OK.  
Storing originals in Mailbox  
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Toll Save.  
Faxing_ 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
6. Press On.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an  
email  
7. Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.  
8. Press OK.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
9. Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
10. Press OK.  
11. Press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
FORWARDING A FAX TO OTHER DESTINATION  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send  
Forward.  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive  
the fax, this feature may be useful.  
6. Press On.  
7. Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on  
the display.  
When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server  
and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Using  
8. Press OK.  
If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax  
with the On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an  
email  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination  
by faxing.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
6. Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
the keyboard on the display.  
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set the  
Forward & Print.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send  
Forward.  
6. Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.  
7. Press OK.  
7. Press OK.  
SETTING UP THE FAX ENDING TONE  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a  
fax  
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other  
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in  
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.  
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can  
be turned on or off.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
page 41.)  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Ending Sound.  
6. Press On.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
7. Press OK.  
6. Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
If you want to set the start time and end time, select Start Time and  
End Time.  
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set  
the Forward & Print.  
7. Press OK.  
Faxing_ 88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
10.  
using usb memory device  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Do not remove the USB memory device while it is in use. The  
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user’s  
misuse.  
If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security  
settings and password settings, your machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see USB  
memory device’s User’s Guide.  
ABOUT USB MEMORY DEVICE  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to  
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, music and  
videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to  
store or move.  
You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:  
Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.  
Print data stored on an USB memory device.  
Format the USB memory device.  
UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN  
To use the USB feature, press USB on the main screen. If the screen  
Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and  
sector size of 512 bytes.  
displays another menu, press (  
) to go to the main screen.  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  
connector.  
Use only an USB memory device with metal-shielded connector.  
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your  
machine, USB icon shows on the screen.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.  
From the USB screen, press USB Format or, USB Print or, Scan to USB.  
USB Format: You can delete files stored on an USB memory device  
one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.  
USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory  
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See  
Scan to USB: You can scan a data and send directly to USB memory  
device. You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each  
page 89.)  
SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB  
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default  
settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan  
Using USB memory device_ 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
Color Mode  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color Mode.  
machine.  
2. Place the originals face up in the document feeder. Or place a single  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
3. Press USB from the main screen.  
Color: Displays an image in color. 24 bits per pixel.  
Gray: Displays an image in gray. 8 bits per pixel.  
4. Press Scan to USB.  
5. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.  
7. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
from the machine.  
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, original type, color mode,  
darkness, and more. The options you change will be maintained for a  
certain time, but after a period, the options will be reset to default values.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if  
Mono has been selected for Color Mode.  
Darkness  
Duplex  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output  
darker.  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned  
are two-sided. You can select whether to scan only one side of the paper or  
both sides of the paper.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow  
to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows  
to toggle the values.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select  
the appropriate option and press OK.  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the  
originals on the document feeder. Because, if the machine can not  
detect the original on document feeder, it automatically changes the  
option to 1 Sided.  
Off: Sets this option off.  
Auto: Automatically adjusts background brightness.  
Enhance: Darkens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values. The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.  
Resolution  
You can adjust document resolution.  
Erase: Lightens the background. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values. The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab >Resolution. Use left/right  
arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you  
get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
Scan to Edge  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially  
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you  
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not  
need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
Original Size  
You can adjust document size.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On and  
press OK.  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Quality  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality  
you select a larger file size you get.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab >Original Type. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.  
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.  
Using USB memory device_ 90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
PDF: PDF 1.4 and below  
Scan Preset  
To print a document from a USB memory device:  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab >Scan Preset. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality  
documents.  
High Quality Printing: Produces a high quality output with the largest  
file size.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size  
of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the  
highest quality images.  
2. Press USB from the main screen.  
3. Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears.  
Select the file name.  
If the file is in a folder, select the folder name.  
Press Select.  
4. Press USB Print.  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size  
of output is small.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
5. Press the Start button on the control panel.  
File Format  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
BMP: Scans original in BMP format.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if  
Mono has been selected for Color Mode.  
File Policy  
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with  
the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name  
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when you  
enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name which is  
automatically programmed.  
Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete previous job information  
on USB as you store new job information.  
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print  
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.  
Direct Print option supported file types:  
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  
compatible. PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check  
box when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN  
file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion  
can be printed directly from USB memory device. (See "Printing to a file  
BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
Using USB memory device_ 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
11.  
machine status and advanced feature  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine  
setup. Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.  
This chapter includes:  
MACHINE SETUP  
BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the  
machine.  
2. Select the appropriate item you want to use.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Machine Details  
This option shows the customer support  
information on the email address and the phone  
number you stored from Admin Setting. Also,  
you can check the machine's serial number, or  
the hardware and software information  
specification.  
Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.  
Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.  
When you press Admin Setting, a login message pops up. Enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
Print/Report  
You can print various helpful and informative  
reports, such as System Report, Fax Report  
and Scan Report. (See "Printing a machine  
Tray Status  
The screen shows the trays installed on your  
machine and their current configurations.  
Machine Status screen  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel, then press Machine Status.  
Usage Counters  
You can view the amount of each category that  
your machine has printed so far. Print this  
Supplies Life tab: Displays both the amount of machine supplies used  
and remaining. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.  
Machine Info tab: Displays detailed information about the machine, as  
well as some options to allow validating your machine.  
GENERAL SETTINGS  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Before using the machine, set up the machine parameter, as follows:  
Admin Setting screen  
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the  
administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every  
time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication  
3. Press the General tab.  
OPTION  
Device Info  
DESCRIPTION  
General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine, such as  
location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 92.)  
Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network, and login. You can also  
enable the features listed on the screen.  
The sub-options available are Service Center  
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter  
information on service center and purchasing  
point.  
Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a report  
of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 96.)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Date & Time  
You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Default Settings  
Default Window: Set the first window that  
appears on the display screen after the  
machine wakes up from the Power Save  
mode. For example, if you select Fax as a  
default window, the first window will be the  
Basic tab of the Fax feature. If you want to  
show ID Copy as a default window, you need  
to enable this feature in Default Option.  
Default Option: Changes all the default  
values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning  
and paper at once. (See "Changing the  
Altitude Adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure.  
The atmospheric pressure is determined by the  
height of the machine above sea level. This  
feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height  
district. The higher the altitude, the higher the  
adjustment, the highest being High 1. (See  
Contention  
Management  
This feature lets you to select the priority  
between copy jobs and print jobs.  
Priority: Set the priority by numbering the  
job. The machine starts from the least to the  
highest number in order.  
Home: Allows user to arrange each function  
in the display screen.  
First In, First Out: The machine does an  
asked job in order.  
Depending on the optional kit installed or  
the category selected, the selectable  
options on the display screen may differ.  
Sound  
You can adjust the noise level of the machine  
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error  
sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong  
option. Press Selection to have the machine  
make a sound whenever you press the selection  
from your touch screen.  
Measurements  
Timers  
This option lets you change the unit of (mm or  
inch) and set the numeric separation (comma or  
period).  
Supplies  
Management  
The machine notifies you when to reorder toner  
cartridge and resets the used fuser counter, bias  
transfer roller, feed roller and document feeder  
friction pad counter.  
The machine cancels a printing job if data is not  
received in specific time.  
System Timeout: The machine returns to  
the default value after waiting a certain  
length of time.  
Machine Test  
You can test the machine by using the Image  
Quality Test Patterns and Loopback Test.  
You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes.  
Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a  
job for a specific time period.  
On Demand  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD when you store new job  
information. To activate this feature, go to  
Admin Setting > the Setup tab > Optional  
Service.  
Set the On Demand Image Overwrite option to  
Enable. After activating this feature, you can  
overwrite an HDD by pressing Start in the  
display.  
Language  
Allows you to change the language that appears  
on the touch screen.  
Power Saver  
Reduce energy consumption by setting power  
Tray Management  
Allows you to select the tray and paper for a  
printing job. Tray Confirmation Message  
activates the window asking whether you set the  
paper size and type for the tray that was just  
opened.  
HDD Spooling  
To spool documents in HDD for the network  
printing, select On.  
Stored Job File  
Policy  
You can choose the file policy for generating file  
name before proceeding with the job through the  
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same  
name when you entered a new file name, you  
can either rename or overwrite it.  
Auto Tray Switch: With this option On and  
both tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size  
paper, the machine automatically prints from  
tray2 after tray1 is empty.  
Rename: If your HDD memory already has  
the same name when you enter a new file  
name, the file will be saved as a different  
name that is automatically programmed.  
Overwrite: You can set the machine to  
delete previous job information on HDD as  
you store new job information  
Auto Continue: When the paper is  
mismatched, meaning that tray1 has filled  
with the letter size paper, but the printing job  
needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait  
for 30 seconds for paper in tray1 with proper  
sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine  
automatically starts printing with letter-sized  
paper.  
Country  
When you change the country, some of the  
values for fax and paper size will be changed  
automatically for the country specified.  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COPY SETUP  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.  
Fax Initial Setup  
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax or  
Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at  
either Tone or Pulse.  
When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you  
can receive a fax while the line is being used by  
the answering machine. (See "Changing the  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.  
Contact your local telephone company for Dial  
Mode setting information.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Page Number  
If you select option On, each copy will include the  
page number on the bottom of each page.  
Ring to Answer  
Receive Header  
You can specify the number of times the machine  
rings before answering an incoming call.  
Time & Date  
ID Stamp  
Set from the General tab, select this option On to  
print the date and time on each copy,  
Use this option to automatically print the page  
number, date, and time of fax reception at the  
bottom of each page.  
This option is used to set words or a message to  
be printed on your copies. Set this option On; an  
input screen will be displayed. Write your  
message using the pop up keyboard.  
Secure Receive  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from  
being accessed by unauthorized people. This  
feature restricts printing of received faxes when  
the machine is unattended. If you select this  
option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.  
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to  
print out received faxes in memory. (See  
FAX SETUP  
This machine offers you various options for setting up the fax system. You  
can change the default settings for your preferences and needs, as follows:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Received Fax  
Printing  
Sets the printing method for the received fax.  
Auto Reduction: When receiving a fax  
containing pages longer than the paper loaded  
in the tray, the machine can reduce the size of  
the original to fit the size of the paper. If this  
feature is set to Off, the machine cannot  
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The  
original will be divided and printed in actual  
size on two or more pages. For example, this  
option is set to Off and Discard Size to 10  
mm, but the received data is longer then the  
currently set paper in the tray, the machine  
omits printing the data that would have been  
on the specified discard segment.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
The fax options are different from country to country depending on the  
International Communications Regulatory. If some of the fax options  
explained in the instructions have been grayed out, it means that the  
grayed-out function is not supported in your communication  
environment.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Machine ID & Fax  
No.  
Enter the machine ID and fax number which will  
be printed at the top of each page. This option is  
usually pre-set for user.  
Duplex: Print the received fax on both sides  
of papers.  
Stapled: If a machine is equipped with a  
staper feature, you can use this option a set of  
received fax to be stapled.  
Receive Start  
Code  
This feature works best when you are using an  
extension telephone connected to the EXT socket  
at the back of your machine. You can receive a fax  
from with whom you are talking on the extension  
telephone, without going to the fax machine. (See  
Redial  
If recipient’s fax machine is busy or not answering,  
the machine can automatically redial a remote fax  
machine. You can set the number of redial  
attempts and the interval between attempts.  
Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the  
machine will not redial.  
Error Correction  
Mode  
It helps with poor line quality and ensures any  
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any  
other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax  
using ECM may take more time.  
Speaker Volume  
Prefix Dial  
This controls the sound when a fax actually starts  
to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine  
emits sound from the beginning to the completion  
of a fax. With Comm, the machine emits sound  
only until the communication has succeeded.  
There is no sound with Off option.  
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five  
digits. User may set this to access a  
PABX(example *9) or area code number (example  
02).  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Junk Fax Setup  
The machine does not accept faxes sent from  
remote stations if their numbers are stored in the  
memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a  
maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk  
Fax Setup, select number and Edit. then, enter  
the last numbers (1~7 digit) of the fax number.  
TCP/IP Protocol  
Select appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
There are lots of parameters to be set.  
Therefore, if you are not sure, leave as is, or  
consult the network administrator.  
Ring Volume  
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you  
select Off, the machine does not ring.  
Apple Talk  
Protocol  
For Macintosh network environments, select this  
option. This option provides packet transmission  
and routing functionality for networking.  
Dial Tone Volume  
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you  
can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone  
volume, use this feature. Value 1 is the lowest  
volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the value.  
Ethernet Speed  
Clear Setting  
Configure the network transmission speed.  
Reverts the network settings to the default values.  
Mailbox Setup  
Document Policy: You can set the document  
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents  
after completion. Select On for each option to  
delete, Off to retain the data.  
Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or  
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox  
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.  
If you set the Notification option to On, you  
are notified when a fax is received in  
page 87.)  
Output Tray  
Toll Save  
This feature lets you select the paper tray to use  
for receiving a fax.  
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time  
Send Batch  
If the fax number you have dialed is the same as  
the delay fax number, the machine asks whether  
you want to add the documents to the reserved  
Fax Forward  
Settings  
You can forward a sent or received fax to other  
destinations via fax or email. (See "Forwarding a  
Fax Ending Sound This setting determines whether the end fax tone  
is on or off. When the fax receiving job is finished,  
machine will give an signal sound. (See "Setting  
NETWORK SETUP  
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing  
that, you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network  
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to  
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the  
network.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
AUTHENTICATION  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the  
password.  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Print/Report tab.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
OPTION  
Print  
SUB-OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
password and press OK.  
You can print Network  
3. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
Configuration, PS3 Font List,  
PCL Font List and Schedule  
Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs  
Report shows the job list in  
pending, in delayed faxing or the  
Mailbox list as well.  
OPTION  
SUB-OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Authentication  
Mode  
Network  
Accounting  
Enables authentication mode  
which can be used for job  
accounting plug-in in the  
SyncThru™Web Admin Service .  
Accounting  
Reports  
Supplies  
Information  
You can print the amount of each  
category that your machine has  
printed so far.  
No  
It disables Authentication Mode.  
Authentication  
Mode  
Network Auth.  
Log Report  
It displays user login IDs and  
email.  
Change Admin. Password  
You can change the password for  
the Admin Setting authentication.  
Usage Page  
Report  
You can print a report on the  
number of printouts based on  
paper size and type.  
OPTIONAL SERVICE  
Accounting  
Report  
You can print a report on the  
number of printouts for each login  
user.  
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to  
install the optional kit, and then, set the machine to enable, and activate  
those features. To enable those features, follow the steps below:  
Report  
Configuration  
Report  
You can print a report on the  
machine's overall configuration.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
Fax Report  
You can set to print the  
information of a fax reports.  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.  
Multi Send Report: When  
you fax to several destinations,  
set this option to print a  
transmission report. Select On  
to print out a confirmation  
report every time you send a  
fax. Select On-Error to print  
out a report only when a  
OPTION  
N/W Scan  
DESCRIPTION  
If you are not using the network scan feature,  
select Disable, then the Scan icon on the display  
will be grayed out.  
Analog Fax  
If you are not using the fax feature, select Disable,  
then the fax icon on the display will be grayed out.  
transmission error occurs.  
Fax Send Report  
On Demand Image This feature is deleting all the information on HDD  
Appearance: You can select  
whether the image on the  
confirmation report shows or  
not.  
Fax Sent/Received Report:  
Select On to have the machine  
store all transmission logs and  
print out after every 50 logs.  
Select Off to have the machine  
store the log but not print out.  
Fax Send Report: The  
machine prints the  
confirmation report after each  
fax job, only when you send a  
fax to one destination.  
Overwrite  
for security reasons. You cannot recover the  
information once it’s been deleted. System  
administrator deletes all the information on HDD.  
From the General tab, select On Demand  
Overwrite > Enable.  
Immediate Image  
Overwrite  
This feature is deleting a specific job information  
on HDD for security reasons. After a job stored on  
the HDD is completed, it’s information is  
automatically deleted. You cannot recover the  
information once it’s been deleted. From the  
General tab select Immediate Image  
Overwrite>Enable.  
PRINTING A REPORT  
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
MENU OVERVIEW  
OPTION  
SUB-OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine  
or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing  
Machine Setup, Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen.  
Refer to the following table.  
E-mail  
Confirmation  
Report  
The report shows the job of  
scanning and sending it via Scan  
to Email.  
On: A report is printed  
whether a job is successfully  
completed or not.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Off: No report is printed.  
On-Error: A report is printed  
only when an error occurs.  
Main screen  
The main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some  
menus are grayed out depending on your model.  
Scan to Server The report shows the job of  
Confirmation  
scanning and sending it via SMB  
and FTP.  
ITEMS  
OPTION  
On: A report is printed  
whether a job is successfully  
completed or not.  
Off: No report is printed.  
On-Error: A report is printed  
Copy  
Basic  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Output  
Original Type  
Darkness  
only when an error occurs.  
You can also print the machine's status information and browse status  
with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Web browser on your  
networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When  
SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print  
information.  
Paper Supply  
Advanced  
ID Copy  
N-Up  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Book Copy  
Booklet  
Covers  
Transparencies  
Image  
Erase Edge  
Erase Background  
Margin Shift  
Fax  
Basic  
Address  
Duplex  
Resolution  
Advanced  
Original Size  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Polling  
Mailbox  
Image  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Erase Background  
Color Mode  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Admin Setting  
ITEMS  
OPTION  
Scan  
Scan to Email  
Basic  
ITEMS  
OPTION  
General  
Device Info  
Date&Time  
Advanced  
Image  
Default Settings  
Measurements  
Timers  
Output  
Scan to PC  
Basic  
Language  
Advanced  
Image  
Output  
Power Saver  
Tray Management  
Altitude Adjustment  
Contention Management  
Sound  
Supplies Management  
Machine Test  
On Demand Overwrite  
HDD Spooling  
Stored Job File Policy  
Country  
Scan to Server  
Basic  
Advanced  
Image  
Output  
Stored Documents  
Public  
Detail  
Edit  
Delete  
Delete All  
Print  
Setup  
Copy Setup  
Fax Setup  
Network Setup  
Authentication  
Optional Service  
Secured  
Detail  
Edit  
Delete  
Print  
Print/Report  
Print  
Accounting Reports  
Report  
USB  
USB Format  
USB Print  
Scan to USB  
Basic  
Usage Page Report  
When the display “Are you sure you want to print it” appears, press  
Advanced  
Image  
Yes.  
Output  
Job Status button  
This menu shows the job in process, jobs waiting and, in completed, and  
Machine Setup button  
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the  
screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life,  
counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to  
use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report prints a  
report on the number of printouts based on the paper size and type.  
ITEMS  
OPTION  
Current Job  
Detail  
Delete  
Delete All  
Close  
Machine Status  
Completed Job  
Active Notice  
Detail  
Close  
ITEMS  
OPTION  
Supplies Life  
Toner Cartridge  
Fuser Kit  
Detail  
Close  
Feed Roller Kit-Tray 1  
Feed Roller Kit-Tray 2  
Feed Roller Kit-Bypass Tray  
BTR Kit  
Machine Info  
Machine Details  
Tray Status  
Print/Report  
Usage Counters  
Machine status and advanced feature_ 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12.  
management tools  
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by  
your machine.  
Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the  
network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, enabling  
Ether Talk and so on.  
Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by  
upgrading firmware and setting security information.  
Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending  
email. You can also connect to SEC website or download drivers by  
selecting Link.  
INTRODUCING USEFUL MANAGEMENT TOOLS  
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.  
USING SYNCTHRU™ WEB SERVICE  
E-mail Notification Setup  
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option.  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP  
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via  
SyncThru™Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™Web  
Service to:  
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.  
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
Change printer preference.  
Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.  
Get support for using the machine.  
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup.  
4. Set required settings.  
To access SyncThru™Web Service:  
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
SyncThru™Web Service overview  
5. Click Apply.  
USING THE SMART PANEL PROGRAM  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine  
status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. Smart Panel is  
installed automatically when you install the machine software.  
Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your  
machine. You can check things, such as the machine’s IP address,  
remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and  
so on. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on.  
To use this program, you need the following system requirements:  
Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with  
your machine. (See "System requirements" on page 33.)  
Mac OS X 10.3 or higher  
Management tools_ 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Linux. Check for Linux systems that are compatible with your  
Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML  
Help.  
Printer  
Setting  
Configure various machine settings in the Printer  
Settings Utility window. Some machines do not  
have this feature.  
4
5
If you need to know the exact model name of your machine, you can  
check the supplied software CD.  
If you connect your machine to a network,  
the SyncThru™ Web Service window  
appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility  
window.  
Understanding Smart Panel  
If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Smart  
Panel.  
Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the  
Printer Preferences window. This feature is  
available only for Windows. (See "Understanding  
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel  
icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux).  
You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).  
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide  
Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.  
Windows  
Double-click this icon in Windows.  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel  
icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.  
Macintosh  
Linux  
Click this icon in Mac OS X.  
Click this icon in Linux.  
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel  
icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options  
window.  
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select  
Programs or All Programs > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.  
If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine,  
first select the correct machine model you want in order to access  
the corresponding Smart Panel.  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart  
Panel icon and select your machine.  
SMARTHRU OFFICE  
The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru Office. SmarThru  
Office offers you convenient features to use with your machine.  
The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s  
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in  
use.  
Starting SmarThru Office  
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:  
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the  
level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of  
information. You can also change settings.  
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly  
connected to each other.  
2. Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the SmarThru  
Office icon on your desktop.  
3. Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
4. The SmarThru Office appears.  
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office help.  
Toner Level  
View the level of toner remaining in the toner  
cartridge(s). The machine and the number of toner  
cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ  
depending on the machine in use. Some machines  
do not have this feature.  
Quick Start Guide  
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons  
include: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR, Fix and  
Enhance, and Samsung Website. You can disable this menu by checking  
Do not show this diaglog again”.  
1
2
Buy Now  
Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.  
View User’s Guide.  
User’s Guide  
This button changes to Troubleshooting  
Guide when error occurs. You can directly  
open troubleshooting section in the user’s  
guide.  
3
Using SmarThru Office  
Scanning  
1. Click scan icon.  
In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru  
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to  
Management tools_ 100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
easily open the Scan Setting window.  
3. Type in necessary information and send your email.  
Fax  
You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office.  
1. Select File > Send to > Send By Fax.  
2. Send Fax window opens.  
In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
SmarThru icon  
in the tray area of the windows taskbar  
3. Type in necessary information and click Send Fax.  
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help >  
SmarThru Office help. The SmarThru Office Help window  
appears; you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office.  
Before you begin the uninstall, ensure that all applications are  
closed on your computer.  
2. Scan Setting window opens.  
a) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.  
b) Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru  
Office.  
c) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read  
the statement and click OK.  
d) Click Finish.  
USING SETIP PROGRAM  
Macintosh and Linux do not support this program.  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is  
the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.  
It is especially for the network administrator to set several network IPs at the  
same time.  
Select  
Allows you to select between the Local or Network  
1
2
3
4
Scanner  
scanner.  
You can only use the SetIP program when your machine is connected  
to a network.  
Select  
Profile  
Allows you to save settings frequently used for  
future use. Click New Profile to save the setting.  
Scan  
Settings  
Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size  
and Paper Source.  
Installing the program  
1. Insert the software CD provided with your machine. When the software  
CD runs automatically, close the window.  
Scan To  
Allows you to customize settings for File Name  
and location to send scanned data.  
2. From the Start menu select My Computer and open the X drive. ( X  
represents your CD-ROM drive.)  
Click Advanced button to set more scan options.  
3. Set scan settings and click Scan.  
3. Double click Application > SetIP.  
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.  
5. Click OK.  
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office help.  
6. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list..  
7. Follow the instructions in the window to complete the installation.  
Send to  
FTP  
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru  
Office.  
1. Select File > Send to > Send By FTP.  
2. Send By FTP window opens.  
Printing out the machine’s MAC address  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report.  
3. Press System Report.  
3. Add your file and click Upload.  
4. Scroll down the list on the right and select Network Configuration  
Email  
Report.  
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office.  
5. Press Print  
You need an email client program, such as Outlook Express, to  
send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for sending email may  
differ depending on email client program you are using.  
1. Select File > Send to> Send By E-mail.  
2. An email client opens.  
Management tools_ 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting network values  
1. Print the machine’s Network Configuration Report to find your  
Printers configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.  
machine’s MAC address.  
Printers tab  
2. From the Windows Start menu, select Programe or All Programs >  
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the  
machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
Samsung Network Printer Utilities > SetIP > SetIP.  
3. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
4. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,  
default gateway, and then click Apply.  
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).  
5. Click OK. The machine prints the network information. Confirm the  
settings are correct.  
6. Click Exit.  
USING THE LINUX UNIFIED DRIVER  
CONFIGURATOR  
The supplied software CD provides you with the Linux Unified Driver  
package for using your machine with a Linux computer.  
Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring  
machine devices. Since a machine device combines the printer and  
scanner, the Linux Unified Driver Configurator provides options logically  
grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also a special machine  
port option responsible for the regulation of access to a machine printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel. Also, you can monitor a number of  
machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
Switches to Printers configuration.  
1
2
3
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Linux Unified Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Shows all of the installed machine.  
Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.  
The printer control buttons are, as follows:  
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator  
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified  
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.  
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.  
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.  
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.  
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration  
window.  
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default  
machine.  
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.  
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is  
working properly.  
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.  
1 Printers  
Configuration  
2 Scanners  
Configuration  
3 Ports  
Configuration  
To use the on screen help, click Help.  
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver  
Configurator.  
Management tools_ 102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a  
document.  
Classes tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.  
Ports configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of  
each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner  
has terminated the job for any reason.  
Shows all of the machine classes.  
1
2
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the  
class.  
Refresh: Renews the classes list.  
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.  
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.  
Switches to Ports configuration.  
1
2
3
Shows all of the available ports.  
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status  
Scanners configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of  
installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties, and scan  
images.  
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.  
Release port: Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port  
or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device  
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of  
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.  
The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing  
mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The  
drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current  
status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration.  
The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of  
the machine device, while another block is in use.  
When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly  
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver  
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the  
new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for  
machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being  
chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied  
by default.  
Switches to Scanners configuration.  
1
2
3
Shows all of the installed scanners.  
Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.  
Management tools_ 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13.  
maintenance  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
Clearing fax memory by printing a fax job  
Print received fax job. Fax memory will automatically be erased.  
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT  
You can print the machine's information and job report.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Clearing fax memory without printing a fax job  
From the Job Status > Current Job tab in the fax’s main LCD.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report.  
To erase all the jobs on the list, click Delete All.  
This option erases all the jobs in the memory, be careful not to erase  
jobs other than a fax job.  
To erase only fax jobs on the list, select fax jobs with in the Job Type list  
and click Delete.  
3. Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the list to  
print.  
4. Select the list to print.  
5. Press Print.  
If you want to print the machine's network information or font list,  
press Machine Setup > Admin Setting > the Print/Report tab >  
Report. If you select the Configuration Report, press Print to  
print the report. The Fax Report, E-mail Confirmation Report,  
and Scan to Server Confirmation options do not provide the  
print, these are only for report setup.  
You can use SyncThru™ Web Service to print the machine's  
configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in the  
networked computer and type the machine's IP address. When  
SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print  
Information.  
SENDING THE TONER REORDER  
NOTIFICATION  
To set the machine to alert when the toner level is low and needs to be  
reordered, do the following:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter the  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge  
Reorder Notification.  
MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE  
4. Press Toner Reorder at Life Remaining and select a percentage.  
To view the supply life indicators, follow the steps below:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status.  
5. Press OK.  
CHECKING STORED DOCUMENTS  
3. Check the used count of each supply item.  
The machine shows the document list of the print or fax job.  
Press Stored Documents on the main screen. If the screen displays  
FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER  
another menu, press (  
) to go to the main screen.  
To check your serial number from the screen, follow the steps below:  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Public tab: Shows the job list of delay print and store print job.  
Secured tab: Shows the job list of secure print, secure receive, and  
secure store print job.  
User Name: Shows the user name who registered the job.  
File Name: Shows the job name, which is registered as the job  
information. For computer printing, the file name shows.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details.  
CLEARING FAX MEMORY  
Date: Shows the date the job was registered.  
Page: Shows the total page number of the job.  
Detail: A separate message appears showing the basic job information  
with file size, paper size and paper type.  
Edit: Lets you modify the file name.  
Delete: Deletes the selected list.  
You can erase fax memory. There are two ways to erasing fax memory,  
follow the steps below:  
If you are clearing fax memory without printing a fax job, you are  
erasing it without checking the content. Be careful not to an erase  
important document.  
Maintenance_ 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Delete All: Deletes the whole list.  
Print: Prints the selected list.  
3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the  
toner cartridge area.  
CLEANING A MACHINE  
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty  
enviroment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best  
printing condition and use your machine longer.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials  
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.  
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with  
toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with  
water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the  
air and might be harmful to you.  
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth  
slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the  
machine.  
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage  
the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents  
such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can  
occur and cause damage to the machine.  
4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the top of the cartridge  
Cleaning the inside  
compartment and gently clean the glass with a swab.  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate  
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as  
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and  
reduces these problems.  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to  
cool down.  
2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean  
flat surface  
5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.  
6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the  
day, as needed.  
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of  
paper, if necessary.  
Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner  
cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching  
this area.  
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass  
until it is clean and dry.  
Maintenance_ 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
1 Scanner lid  
2 Scanner glass  
3 Document feeder  
glass  
4 White sheet  
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean  
and dry.  
5. Close the scanner lid.  
STORING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
To get the best, print quality from the toner cartridge, keep the following  
guidelines in mind:  
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready to use.  
Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover  
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.  
Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.  
Expected cartridge life  
The life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print  
jobs require. The actual number may also be different depending on the  
print density of the pages you print on, and the number of pages may be  
affected by the operating environment, printing interval, media type, and  
media size. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the  
cartridge more often.  
TIPS FOR MOVING & STORING YOUR MACHINE  
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise,  
the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can  
cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.  
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding  
the machine securely.  
When moving the machine or when machine is not in use for a long time,  
lock the scanner lock. (See "Front view" on page 27.)  
Maintenance_ 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
14.  
troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
place completely.  
REDISTRIBUTING TONER  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:  
White streaks or light printing occurs.  
Toner is low. Order new toner cartridge appears on the display.  
The Status LED blinks red.  
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing  
the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light  
printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.  
1. Open the front cover.  
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.  
5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.  
3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner  
evenly inside the cartridge.  
CLEARING ORIGINAL DOCUMENT JAMS  
When an original jams while passing through the document feeder, a  
warning message appears on the display screen.  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly  
and gently.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or  
mixed paper-type originals.  
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the  
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into  
the opening in the machine.  
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the  
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into  
Troubleshooting_ 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1. Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
5. Open the document feeder inner cover. Gently remove the jammed  
paper.  
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the document  
output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
If you see no paper in this area, go to the next step  
3. Open the document feeder cover.  
If you see no paper in this area, go to step 7.  
6. Close the document feeder inner cover and the document feeder cover.  
Reload the pages you removed, if any, in the document feeder.  
7. Open the scanner lid.  
8. Grasp the misfeed paper and, using both hands, remove the paper from  
the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right.  
4. Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
1 scanner lid  
9. Close the scanner lid. Load the removed pages back into the document  
feeder.  
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines.  
If you see no paper in this area, go to the next step  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper  
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and  
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in  
the tray, or facing up in the multi-purpose tray.  
Troubleshooting_ 108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:  
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the  
tray.  
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex) is not  
supported.  
In the Printing Preferences window, set the page orientation to be  
rotated 90 degrees. (See "Paper tab" on page 55.)  
CLEARING PAPER JAMS  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper  
in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. (See  
When a paper jam occurs, a warning message appears on the display  
screen.  
4. Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and  
gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the  
jam.  
automatically resumes.  
In optional tray 2  
In tray 1  
1. Pull out optional tray 2.  
2. Remove the jammed paper from the machine.  
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically  
ejected from the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.  
2. Pull out tray 1 .  
If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper  
in this area, stop and go to the next step.  
3. Pull tray 1 half-way out.  
Troubleshooting_ 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Pull the paper straight up and out.  
1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it  
down.  
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
5. Insert the trays back into the machine. Printing automatically resumes.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.  
3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing  
automatically resumes.  
In exit area  
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically  
ejected from the machine.  
2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.  
2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.  
Inside the machine  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the  
machine.  
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when  
you pull, stop and go to the next step.  
3. Open the rear cover.  
Troubleshooting_ 110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. If you see the jammed paper, push the pressure lever on each side up  
7. While pushing the fuser lever to the right, open the fuser door.  
and remove the paper. Skip to step 9.  
8. Pull the jammed paper out.  
If the jammed paper does not move when you pull, push the pressure  
lever on each side up to loosen the paper, and then remove it.  
If you still do not see the paper, go to the next step.  
5. Release the strip, the rear cover stopper, and fully open the rear cover,  
as shown.  
9. Return the lever, door, stopper, and guide to their original position.  
10. Close the rear cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
In the duplex unit area  
6. Unfold the duplex guide fully.  
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, a paper jam may occur. Make  
sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.  
1. Pull the duplex unit out of the machine.  
Troubleshooting_ 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit.  
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES  
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s  
status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and  
their meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.  
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the  
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.  
When you call for service, provide the service representative with  
the contents of display message.  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models.  
If the paper does not come out with the duplex unit, remove the paper  
from the bottom of the machine.  
Insert the duplex unit into the machine.  
[zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service  
center, this error code help to handle the problem.  
You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark ( ) on  
the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question mark  
to browse detailed information on the supplies.  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Fax memory is  
There is no more  
Print the received fax or  
almost full. Print or available fax memory. delete them from the fax  
remove received  
fax Job  
No more fax data can memory. Call for service  
be received. to delete fax memory.  
Fax memory is full. Available fax memory Delete the received fax  
If you still do not see the paper, go to the next step.  
3. Open the rear cover.  
Print or remove  
received fax Job  
is now 1MB.  
data in the memory to  
secure memory. Call for  
service.  
4. Unfold the duplex guide fully.  
Fuser error: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
There is a problem in  
Turn the machine off and  
the fuser unit working. back on again. If the  
problem persists, call for  
service.  
LSU error: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
There is a problem in  
the control of LSU  
unit.  
Turn the machine off and  
back on again. If the  
problem persists, call for  
service.  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
The originals are  
jammed in document  
feeder.  
Open the document  
feeder cover and remove  
the jammed original.  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
duplex path  
The originals are  
jammed during duplex  
printing in the  
Clear the jam.  
5. Pull the jammed paper out.  
document feeder.  
Original paper jam  
inside of scanner  
The failed to activate  
the gate sensor within feeder cover and remove  
the correct time after  
activating the scan  
sensor.  
Open the document  
the jammed original.  
When the machine is  
on, jammed paper is  
detected in the  
document feeder.  
6. Fold the duplex guide and close the rear cover.  
Troubleshooting_ 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Original paper jam  
while reversing  
paper in scanner  
The document failed  
to activate the duplex  
sensor within the  
correct time while  
reversing the  
Lift up the document  
input tray and remove the  
jammed original. (See  
"Clearing original  
This IP address  
conflicts with an IP used elsewhere.  
address already in  
The IP address is  
Check the IP address or  
obtain a new IP address.  
use. Check it  
Toner cartridge is  
not compatible.  
Check user’s guide not for your machine.  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is  
Install a  
document.  
Samsung-genuine toner  
cartridge, designed for  
your machine. (See  
Paper Jam at the  
bottom of duplex  
path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. the duplex unit area" on  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
Paper Jam at the  
top of duplex path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. the duplex unit area" on  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
Toner cartridge is  
not installed.  
Install it  
The toner cartridge is  
not installed or the  
CRUM (Consumer  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
Try to install or reinstall  
the toner cartridge.  
Paper Jam in exit  
area  
Paper has jammed in  
the fuser area.  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
cartridge is not  
properly connected.  
Paper Jam in MP  
tray  
Paper misfed from  
multi-purpose tray  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
Toner cartridge is  
The toner cartridge  
You can select the option  
among Stop, Continue.  
If you select Stop, the  
machine stops printing. If  
you select Continue, the  
machine keeps printing,  
but the quality cannot be  
guaranteed. (See  
worn. Replace with has run out. The  
Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
new one  
machine stops  
printing.  
the feeding area of the tray 1" on page 109.)  
tray.  
Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
the feeding area of the optional tray 2" on  
tray.  
Paper Jam inside  
of duplex path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. the duplex unit area" on  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
Toner is empty.  
Replace toner  
cartridge  
The toner cartridge  
has reached the end  
of its lifespan.  
This message appears  
when the toner is  
Paper Jam inside  
of machine  
Paper has jammed in  
the registration area.  
Clear the jam. (See  
completely empty, and  
your machine stops  
printing. Replace the  
toner cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine toner  
cartridge. (See  
Scanner locking  
switch is locked or Couple Device) lock  
another problem  
occurred  
The CCD (Charged  
Unlock the CCD lock.  
page 27. ) Or turn off the  
machine and on again. If  
the problem persists, call  
for service.  
has been locked.  
Toner is low. Order The toner cartridge is  
new toner  
cartridge  
Ensure a replacement  
cartridge is in stock. (See  
Sensor failure:  
[zzz]. Call for  
service  
There is a problem in  
the sensor signal.  
Turn the machine off and  
back on again. If the  
problem persists, call for  
service.  
almost empty.  
Shake toner  
cartridge  
The toner supply is  
low.  
Thoroughly roll the new  
cartridge five or six times  
to distribute the toner  
evenly inside the  
cartridge. (See  
System error: [zzz]. There is a problem in  
Turn the machine off and  
Please turn off  
then on  
the system operation. back on again. If the  
problem persists, call for  
service.  
Troubleshooting_ 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is  
corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.  
Transparenciesstick Use only transparencies specifically designed  
together in the paper for laser printers. Remove each transparency as  
exit.  
it exits from the machine.  
Envelopes skew or  
fail to feed correctly. sides of the envelopes.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both  
Touch screen problem  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The touch screen  
does not show  
anything.  
Turn the machine off and back on again. If the  
problem persists, call for service.  
Paper feeding problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Paper jams during  
printing.  
Clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper jams"  
Paper sticks  
together.  
Check the maximum paper capacity of the  
Make sure that you are using the correct type  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan  
the paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
stick together.  
Multiple sheets of  
paper do not feed.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
Paper does not feed  
into the machine.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the  
machine.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the document feeder rubber pad may require  
to be replaced. Contact a service  
representative.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose  
tray.  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the machine. (See "Print media  
There may be debris inside the machine.  
Open the front cover and remove any debris.  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the document feeder rubber pad may need to  
be replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Troubleshooting_ 114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing problems  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
(Continued) The  
The document size  
machine does not is so big that the  
Get more hard disk space  
and print the document  
again.  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
print.  
hard disk space of  
the computer is  
insufficient to  
access the print job.  
The machine is not  
selected as the  
default machine.  
Select your machine as your  
default machine in your  
Windows.  
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong paper  
source.  
The paper option  
that was selected in applications, the paper  
the Printing  
Preferences may  
be incorrect.  
For many software  
source selection is found  
under the Paper tab within  
the Printing Preferences.  
Select the correct paper  
source. See the printer  
driver help screen. (See  
Check the machine for the following:  
The front cover is not closed. Close the front  
cover.  
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See  
No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "Loading  
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the  
toner cartridge.  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be  
very complex.  
Reduce the complexity of  
the page or try adjusting the  
print quality settings.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page  
orientation setting  
may be incorrect.  
Change the page orientation  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
The connection  
Disconnect the machine  
cable and reconnect it.  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is not  
The paper size and Ensure that the paper size in  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
connected properly.  
The connection  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is  
If possible, attach the cable  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
job. You can also try using a  
different machine cable.  
defective.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to make sure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is  
attached to the correct one.  
The machine may  
be configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the Printing  
Preferences to ensure that  
all of the print settings are  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Repair the machine  
"Installing network  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a  
service representative.  
Troubleshooting_ 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
CONDITION  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The machine cable  
is loose or  
defective.  
Disconnect the machine  
cable and reconnect. Try a  
print job that you have  
already printed successfully.  
If possible, attach the cable  
and the machine to another  
computer that you know  
works and try a print job.  
Finally, try a new machine  
cable.  
The machine  
does not print  
special- sized  
paper, such as  
billing paper.  
Paper size and  
paper size setting  
do not match.  
Set the correct paper size in  
the Custom in the Paper tab  
in the Printing Preferences.  
incomplete.  
page 55.)  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,  
there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the  
problem.  
The wrong printer  
Check the application’s  
driver was selected. printer selection menu to  
ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Light or faded print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area  
appears on the page, the toner supply is low.  
You may be able to temporarily extend the  
toner cartridge life. (See"Redistributing toner"  
on page 107.) If this does not improve the  
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.  
The paper may not meet paper specifications;  
for example, the paper may be too moist or  
If the entire page is light, the print resolution  
setting is too low or the toner save mode is  
on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the  
toner save mode off. See the help screen of  
the printer driver.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. (See "Cleaning the  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The operating  
system is  
malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the  
computer. Turn the machine  
off and back on again.  
If you are in a DOS Change the language  
environment, the setting. (See "Changing the  
font setting for your font setting" on page 43.)  
machine may be  
set incorrectly.  
Pages print, but  
they are blank.  
The toner cartridge  
Redistribute the toner, if  
is defective or out of necessary.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
Some parts, such  
as the controller or  
the board, may be  
defective.  
Contact a service  
representative.  
Toner specks  
The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper may be too moist or  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
The machine  
does not print  
Incompatibility  
between the PDF  
Printing the PDF file as an  
image may enable the file to  
PDF filecorrectly. file and the Acrobat print. Turn on Print As  
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a  
service representative.  
Some parts of  
graphics, text, or  
illustrations are  
missing.  
products.  
Image from the Acrobat  
printing options.  
It will take longer to  
print when you print a  
PDF file as an image.  
The print quality  
of photos is not  
good. Images are low.  
The resolution of  
the photo is very  
Reduce the photo size. If  
you increase the photo size  
in the software application,  
the resolution will be  
reduced.  
not clear.  
Before printing,  
the machine  
emits vapor near  
the output tray.  
Using damp paper  
can cause vapor  
during printing.  
This is not a problem. Just  
keep printing.  
Troubleshooting_ 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
Dropouts  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of  
the page at even intervals:  
A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you  
still have the same problem, remove the  
toner cartridge and, instll a new one. (See  
Parts of the machine may have toner on  
them. If the defects occur on the back of the  
page, the problem will likely correct itself  
after a few more pages.  
The moisture content of the paper is uneven  
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.  
Try a different brand of paper. (See "Print  
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,  
and set type to Thick. (See "Opening  
The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
Background  
scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an envelope,  
change the printing layout to avoid printing  
over areas that have overlapping seams on  
the reverse side. Printing on seams can  
cause problems.  
If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or in Printing Preferences. (See  
White Spots  
If white spots appear on the page:  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a  
paper falls to the inner devices within the  
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.  
Clean the inside of your machine. (See  
The paper path may need cleaning. (See  
A
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface (drum part) of the toner  
cartridge inside the machine has probably  
been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge  
and install a new one. (See "Replacing the  
Misformed  
characters  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may  
need service. (See "Cleaning the scan unit"  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. (See "Cleaning the  
Color or Black  
background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
Change to a lighter weight paper. (See "Print  
Check the environmental conditions: very  
dry conditions or a high level of humidity  
(higher than 80% RH) can increase the  
amount of background shading.  
Page skew  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print  
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too  
loose against the paper stack.  
Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a  
Toner smear  
If toner smears on the page:  
Clean the inside of the machine. (See  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print  
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install  
Troubleshooting_ 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONDITION  
Curl or wave  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface of  
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
The paper may not meet paper  
specifications. (See "Print media  
A
Wrinkles or  
creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
The toner cartridge may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the machine:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,  
and set type to Thin. (See "Opening Printing  
An unknown image Your machine is probably being used at an  
Solid Color or  
Black pages  
The toner cartridge may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new  
repetitively  
appears on a few  
sheets or loose  
altitude of 1,500 m (4,921 ft) or above.  
The high altitude may affect the print quality,  
such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the  
toner, light print, or correct altitude setting to your machine. (See  
contamination  
occurs.  
The machine may require repair. Contact a  
service representative.  
Copying problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTION  
Loose toner  
Clean the inside of the machine. (See  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "Print  
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a  
Copies are too light  
or too dark  
Use Light and Dark arrows to lighten or darken  
the backgrounds of copies in the Basic tab of  
the Copy menu.  
Smears, lines,  
If the defects are on the original, press Light  
and Dark arrows to lighten the background of  
your copies in the Basic tab of the Copy  
menu.  
If there are no defects on the original, clean  
marks, or spots  
appear on copies.  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Troubleshooting_ 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTION  
CONDITON  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the document  
feeder.  
The unit scans very  
slowly.  
Check if the machine is printing received  
data. If so, scan the document after the  
received data has been printed.  
Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the document  
feeder.  
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from  
a new package.  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in  
the machine for extended periods of time.  
Message appears on  
your computer  
screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in  
progress. Try your job again when that job is  
finished.  
Frequent copy paper  
jams occur.  
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the  
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh  
supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if  
necessary.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
weight.  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper  
remaining in the machine after a paper jam  
has been cleared.  
Device can’t be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.  
Port is being used  
by another  
The selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
The machine cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the machine is properly  
connected and the power is on, then restart  
your computer.  
program.  
Port is Disabled.  
Scanner is busy  
receiving or  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than  
expected before  
running out of toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or  
heavy lines. For example, your originals may  
be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The scanner lid may be left open while copies  
are being made.  
printing data.  
When the current  
job is completed.,  
try again.  
Invalid handle.  
Scanning has  
failed.  
The USB cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
Turn the machine off and back on.  
Scanning problems  
CONDITON  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Fax problems  
The scanner does not  
work.  
Make sure that you place the original to be  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the document feeder.  
There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works.  
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.  
Check that the machine cable is connected  
properly.  
Make sure that the machine cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known  
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the  
SmarThru Office or the application you want  
to use to make certain that the scanner job  
is being sent to the correct port (for example,  
USB001).  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display, or the  
buttons are not  
working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power being supplied to  
the electrical outlet.  
No dial tone.  
Check that the phone line is properly  
connected.  
Check that the phone socket on the wall is  
working by plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored Make sure that the numbers are stored in  
in memory do not  
dial correctly.  
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book list.  
The original does  
not feed into the  
machine.  
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the  
original is the right size, not too thick or thin.  
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly  
closed.  
The document feeder rubber pad may need to  
be replaced. Contact a service  
representative.  
Troubleshooting_ 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to fax.  
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem  
PostScript file  
cannot be printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install the PostScript  
driver. (See "Installing  
USB connected  
network connected  
page 39.)  
Print a configuration  
page and verify that  
the PS version is  
available for printing.  
If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
representative.  
The machine does  
not send.  
Make sure that the original is loaded in the  
document feeder or on the scanner glass.  
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to  
see if it can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax  
has blank spaces or  
is of poor-quality.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may be  
faulty.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your machine by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace  
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the toner  
Some of the words  
on an incoming fax  
are stretched.  
The fax machine sending the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
“Limit Check Error”  
report prints.  
The print job was  
too complex.  
You might need to  
reduce the complexity of  
the page or install more  
memory. (See "Installing  
There are lines on  
the originals you  
sent.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
A PostScript error  
page prints.  
The print job may  
not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print  
job is a PostScript job.  
Check to see whether  
the software application  
expected a setup or  
PostScript header file to  
be sent to the machine.  
The machine dials a  
number, but the  
connection with the  
other fax machine  
fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of  
paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak  
with the other machine operator and ask her/him  
to solve out the problem.  
Faxes do not store in There may not be enough memory space to  
memory.  
store the fax. If the display indicating the  
memory status shows, delete any faxes you no  
longer need from the memory, and then try to  
store the fax again. Call for service.  
The optional tray is  
not selected in the  
driver.  
The printer driver  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
Open the PostScript  
driver properties, select  
the Device Settings tab,  
and set the tray option of  
the Installable Options  
section to Installed.  
Blank areas appear  
at the bottom of  
each page or on  
other pages, with a  
small strip of text at  
the top  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings  
in the user option setting. For details about  
When printing a  
document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat Reader 6.0  
or higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
The resolution  
setting in the printer resolution setting in your  
driver may not be  
matched with the  
one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Make sure that the  
printer driver matches  
the one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Samsung Scan Manager Problem  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTION  
Common Windows problems  
Samsung Scan  
Manager does not  
work.  
Check your system requirements. Samsung  
Scan Manager works in Window and Macintosh  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the printer’s startup group, then  
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are used.  
“General Protection  
Fault”, “Exception  
OE”, “Spool 32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
Troubleshooting_ 120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Common Linux problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
These messages may appear during printing.  
printer timeout error Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  
occurred” messages printing. If the message appears in standby  
The machine does  
not print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your  
system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and  
switch to the Printers tab in Printers  
configuration window to look at the list of  
available machines. Make sure that your  
machine is displayed on the list. If not, open  
Add new printer wizard to set up your  
device.  
Check if the machine is started. Open  
Printers configuration and select your  
machine on the printers list. Look at the  
description in the Selected printer pane. If its  
status contains Stopped string, press the  
Start button. After that normal operation of  
the machine should be restored. The  
appear.  
mode or after printing has been completed,  
check the connection and/or whether an error  
has occurred.  
Refer to Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista User’s Guide that  
came with your computer for further information on Windows error  
messages.  
“stopped” status might be activated when  
some problems in printing occurred. For  
instance, this could be an attempt to print a  
document when the port is claimed by a  
scanning application.  
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of machine (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” applications to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them at a time is allowed to gain control  
over the device. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. You  
should open ports configuration and select  
the port assigned to your machine. In the  
Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should either wait for  
completion of the current job or press the  
Release port button, if you are sure that the  
present application is not functioning properly.  
Check if your application has special print  
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified  
in the command line parameter, then remove  
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command  
line parameter in the command item.  
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2  
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet  
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket  
printing instead of ipp or install a later version  
of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).  
Some color images  
come out all black.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed color space  
and is converted through CIE color space.  
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  
Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
Troubleshooting_ 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Some color images  
come out in  
unexpected colors.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed RGB color  
space and it is converted through CIE color  
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space  
for Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
The machine does  
not appear on the  
scanners list.  
Ensure your machine is attached to your  
computer, connected properly via the USB  
port, and is turned on.  
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is  
installed in your system. Open Unified Linux  
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make  
sure that driver with a name corresponding to  
your machine's name is listed in the window.  
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of machine (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” applications to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them at a time is allowed to gain control  
over the device. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. This  
usually happens when starting a scan  
procedure. An appropriate message box  
appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, open  
the Ports configuration and select the port  
assigned to your scanner, port's symbol  
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at  
/dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to  
/dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth  
www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does  
not print whole  
pages, and output is Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been  
printed on half the  
page.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color  
machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of  
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript  
Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL  
Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the  
latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from  
http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and  
install it to solve this problem.  
I cannot scan via  
Gimp Front-end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device  
dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should  
install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your  
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package  
for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home  
page. For the detailed information, refer to the  
Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end  
application.  
If you wish to use another kind of scan  
sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you  
can see if the port is occupied by another  
application. If this is the case, you should  
either wait for completion of the current job or  
press the Release port button, if you are sure  
that the present port applicaton is not  
functioning properly.  
application, refer to application’s Help.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR  
GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.  
Known versions of CUPS server break the print  
printing a document. job whenever print options are changed and  
then try to restart the job from the beginning.  
Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while  
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver  
keeps the port locked and unavailable for  
The machine does  
not scan.  
Ensure a document is loaded into the  
machine, ensure your machine is connected  
to the computer.  
subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try  
to release the port by selecting Release port in  
Port configuration window.  
If there is an I/O error while scanning.  
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further  
information on Linux error messages.  
Common Macintosh problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine does  
not print PDF files  
correctly. Some  
parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations  
are missing.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable  
the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the  
Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a  
PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
Update your MAC OS to OS MAC OS X 10.3.3.  
printed, but the print or higher.  
job has not  
disappeared from  
the spooler in Mac  
OS X10.3.2.  
Troubleshooting_ 122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Some letters are not Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover  
displayed normally  
during the cover  
page printing.  
page printing. The English alphabet and  
numbers are displayed normally on the cover  
page.  
When printing a  
document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat Reader 6.0  
or higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
Make sure that the resolution setting in your  
machine driver matches the one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for  
further information on Macintosh error messages.  
Troubleshooting_ 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15.  
supplies and accessories  
This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your  
sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories.  
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s  
performance and capacity.  
HOW TO PURCHASE  
ACCESSORY  
FUNCTION  
Extend your  
machine’s memory  
capacity.  
PART NAME  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories and, maintenance  
parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you  
Memory module  
CLP-MEM202: 256 MB  
Optional tray 2  
If you are  
experiencing  
SCX-S5835A  
AVAILABLE SUPPLIES  
frequent paper  
supply problems,  
you can attach an  
additional 500 sheet  
tray. You can print  
documents in  
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of  
supplies for your machine:  
AVERAGE YIELDa  
TYPE  
PART NAME  
various sizes and  
types of print  
materials.  
Standard yield  
Approx. 4,000 pages  
MLT-D208S  
Region Ab:  
MLT-D2082S  
Region Bc:  
MLT-D206S  
SmarThru  
Workflow  
Windows  
SOL-STWFV2  
2000/XP/2003. This  
feature lets you send  
additional  
information along  
with the scanned  
document to a  
specified network  
location.  
High yield  
Approx. 10,000 pages  
MLT-D208L  
Region Ab:  
MLT-D2082L  
Region Bc:  
MLT-D206L  
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
b.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus,  
Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,  
Hungary, Italy, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal,  
Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.  
AVAILABLE MAINTENANCE PARTS  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts  
and to maintain your machine in top working condition, the following parts  
will need to be replaced after printing the specified number of pages or  
when the life span of each item has expired.  
c. Region B (only SCX-5935FN): U.S.A, Canada  
To replace a toner cartridge: (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on  
AVERAGE YIELDa  
PARTS  
PART NAME  
RMO ADF  
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s  
lifespan may differ.  
Document feeder  
rubber pad  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
RUBBER  
You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same  
country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will  
be incompatable with your machine since the system configuration of  
these vary from country to country.  
Transfer roller  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
ROLLER-TRANSF  
ER  
Fuser unit  
ELA UNIT-FUSER  
Supplies and accessories_ 124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the  
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
AVERAGE YIELDa  
PARTS  
PART NAME  
RPR-PAD  
Tray rubber pad  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
5. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into  
CASSETTE  
the opening in the machine.  
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the  
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into  
place completely.  
Pickup roller  
Approx. 150,000 pages  
ROLLER-PICK UP  
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,  
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and  
job complexity.  
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the  
machine.  
Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized  
service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The  
warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts after  
their lifespan.  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:  
Toner cartridge is worn. Replace with new one appears on the  
display.  
The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.  
6. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.  
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN  
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES  
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the  
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Available supplies" on page 124.)  
1. Open the front cover.  
Disconnect the power cord.  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.  
Discharge static electricity.  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or  
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or  
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your  
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any  
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before  
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static  
electricity again.  
Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties.  
After installing an accessory such as an optional tray, PS driver users  
must do the additional setting. Go to the PS printer properties and set  
the added accesorry activated.  
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.  
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a  
service component. Do not change it by yourself.  
4. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge.  
There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect  
type. Dispose used batteries according to the instructions.  
UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory  
module slot to install additional memory.  
The machine has two memory slots with a factory pre-installed memory  
module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can  
add a memory module to the vacant memory slot. It is strongly  
recommended that you expand a memory module in the vacant memory  
slot, and not by removing a pre-installed memory module. If your machine  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Supplies and accessories_ 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
has 256 MB memory capacity and you want to add 256 MB, the memory  
capacity expands up to 512 MB. Order information is provided for additional  
If you use the PS driver, you must activate the added memory in the  
PS driver properties.  
Activating the added accessories in PS printer  
properties  
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.  
Installing a memory module  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
2. Grasp the control board cover and remove it.  
page 39.)  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
3. Select the your machine’s PS driver and right-click to open Properties.  
4. Select Device Settings.  
5. Select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options.  
6. Click OK.  
3. Remove the new memory module from its bag.  
CHECKING REPLACEABLE’S LIFESPAN  
4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on  
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the  
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the  
number of pages the machine has printed. Replace the corresponding  
parts, if necessary.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Supplies Life tab.  
REPLACING THE DOCUMENT FEEDER RUBBER  
PAD  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those  
on an actual memory module and its slot.  
You will need to replace the document feeder rubber pad when there seems  
to be a consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is  
reached.  
5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.  
1. Open the document feeder cover.  
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be  
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,  
carefully try the previous procedure again.  
2. Remove the document feeder rubber pad from the document feeder, as  
shown below.  
6. Close the control board cover by aligning the groove on it with the notch  
on the machine and sliding it.  
1 Document  
feeder rubber  
pad  
3. Insert a new document feeder rubber pad into place.  
4. Close the document feeder cover.  
7. Reconnect the power cord and machine cable. Turn on the machine.  
Supplies and accessories_ 126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
16.  
specifications  
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.  
This chapter include:  
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS  
The symbol * optional feature depending on machines.  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Document feedera Capacity  
Document feeder document size  
Paper input capacity  
Up to 50 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Width: 142 to 216 mm (5.6 x 8.5 inches)/ Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 x 14 inches)  
Tray: 500 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Multi-purpose tray: 50 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Optional tray: 500 sheets for plain paper, 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Paper output capacity  
Power rating  
Face down: 250 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V  
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine.  
Power consumption  
Average operating mode: Less than 750 W  
Ready mode: Less than 100 W  
Power Save mode: Less than 25 W  
Power off mode: 0 W  
Noise Levelb  
Ready mode: 39 dB(A)  
Printing mode: 52 dB(A)  
Copying mode: 54 dB(A)  
Default time to power save mode  
from ready mode  
30 Minutes  
Boot-up timec  
Less than 50 seconds  
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in the HDD  
Operating environment  
Temperature: 10 to 32 °C (50 to 89.6 °F)  
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH  
Display  
WVGA (800 x 480 x RGV) color  
Toner cartridge lifed  
Standard yield  
Average Cartridge Yield 4,000 standard pages.  
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC  
(Shipped with 4,000 pages Starter toner cartridge.)  
High yield  
Average Cartridge Yield 10,000 standard pages.  
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC  
Memory (Expandable)*  
256 MB (Max. 512 MB)  
Specifications_ 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ITEM  
External dimension  
DESCRIPTION  
500 x 465 x 547 mm  
(19.7 x 18.3 x 21.5 inches) without optional tray  
(W x D x H)  
Weight  
23.1 Kg (50.88 lbs)  
(Including consumables)  
Package weight  
Paper: 2.9 Kg (6.29 lbs)  
Plastic: 1.9 Kg (4.17 lbs)  
Duty cycle  
Up to 80,000 pages (Monthly)  
180 °C (356 °F)  
Fusing temperature  
a.Document feeder is synonymous with DADF.  
b.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.  
c. Boot-up time is the time that takes from the power switch on to the ready mode.  
d.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and  
media size.  
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Printing method  
Printing speeda  
Laser beam printing  
Up to 33 ppm (A4), 35 ppm (Letter)  
Up to 17 ipm (A4), 18 ipm (Letter)  
8.5 seconds (from ready)  
Duplex printing speed  
First print out time  
Print resolution  
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective output  
Printer language  
OS compatibilityb  
PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF1.4, TIFF, Epson/ IBM Pro (Israel only)  
Windows: 2000/XP/2003/Vista/2008  
Various Linux OS ( See "Linux" on page 33.)  
Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3~10.5  
Interface  
High speed USB 2.0  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (Embedded type)  
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job complexity.  
Specifications_ 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Compatibility  
Scanning method  
Resolutiona  
TWAIN standard/WIA standard  
Color CCD  
TWAIN standard  
WIA standard  
Scan to USB  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x 4,800 dpi by software enhancement)  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
Scan to Email  
Scan to Server  
100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi  
Network Scan File format  
Effective scanning length  
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb  
Scanner glass: 289 mm (11.38 inches)  
Document feeder: 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
Effective scanning width  
Color bit depth  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)  
Internal: 36 bit  
External: 24 bit  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for lineart & halftone  
8 bit for gray scale  
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.  
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.  
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Copy Speeda  
Up to 33 cpm (A4), 35 cpm (Letter)  
Duplex copy speed  
Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 17 ipm in A4 (18 ipm in Letter)  
Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 13 ipm in A4 (14 ipm in Letter)  
First copy out time  
Copy resolution  
Scanner glass: 9.5 seconds (from ready)  
Document feeder: 11.5 seconds (from ready)  
Text  
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
Text/photo  
Photo  
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Document feeder: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
Zoom range  
Scanner glass: 25% to 400%  
Document feeder: 25% to 200%  
a.Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.  
Specifications_ 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS  
The fax feature may not be supported depending on machines.  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Compatibility  
ITU-T G3  
Applicable line  
Data coding  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem speed  
Transmission speed  
Maximum document length  
Resolution  
Up to 3 seconds/pagea  
356 mm (14 inches)  
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi (Rxb only)  
Memory  
HDD Backup (Receive: 2,000 pages, Send: 500 pages)  
Halftone  
Auto dialer  
256 levels  
up to 200 numbers  
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase “C” by ITU-T No. 1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
b.Rx stands for receiving a fax.  
Specifications_ 130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PRINT MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS  
PRINT MEDIA WEIGHTa/CAPACITYb  
TYPE  
SIZE  
DIMENSIONS  
TRAY1 / OPTIONAL TRAY  
MULTIPURPOSE TRAY  
Plain paper  
Letter  
Legal  
US Folio  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond)  
500 sheets of 80g/m2 (20 lb  
bond)  
50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)  
250 sheets of 80 g/m2(20 lb  
bond)  
Executive  
A5  
Statement  
A6  
Not available in tray1 / optional  
trays.  
Envelope  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
Not available in tray1 / optional  
trays.  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)  
5 sheets stacking  
Thick paper  
Thin paper  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond)  
90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond)  
20 sheets stacking  
350 sheets stacking  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond)  
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond)  
50 sheets stacking  
500 sheets stacking  
Transparency  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Not available in tray1 / optional  
trays.  
138 to 146 g/m2 (36.81 to 38.91 lb  
bond)  
5 sheets stacking  
Labelsc  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Not available in tray1 / optional  
trays.  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond)  
5 sheets stacking  
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement, PostCard  
4 x 6  
Not available in tray1 / optional  
trays.  
105 to 163 g/m2 ( 28 to 43lb bond)  
5 sheets stacking  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond)  
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), load a paper into the tray one by one.  
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield)  
Specifications_ 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
contact samsung worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
WEB SITE  
INDIA  
3030 8282  
1800 110011  
1-800-3000-8282  
ARGENTINE  
AUSTRALIA  
AUSTRIA  
0800-333-3733  
1300 362 603  
INDONESIA  
ITALIA  
0800-112-8888  
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
1-800-234-7267  
0120-327-527  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com/at  
€ 0.07/min)  
BELGIUM  
BRAZIL  
02 201 2418  
JAMAICA  
JAPAN  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
LATVIA  
8000-7267  
CANADA  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
CHILE  
CHINA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl  
02 261 03 710  
1800-88-9999  
800-810-5858  
400-810-5858  
010-6475 1880  
01-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
COLOMBIA  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG(726-7864  
COSTA RICA  
€ 0,10/min)  
CZECH  
REPUBLIC  
800-726-786 (800 -  
SAMSUNG)  
NEW ZEALAND  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 www.samsung.com/nz  
786)  
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis  
Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
NICARAGUA  
NORWAY  
00-1800-5077267  
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
800-7267  
DENMARK  
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
1-800-10-7267  
800-6225  
PANAMA  
ECUADOR  
PHILIPPINES  
1800-10-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
EL SALVADOR  
ESTONIA  
800-7267  
POLAND  
0-801-1SAMSUNG  
(172678)  
022-607-93-33  
KAZAKHSTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/kz_r  
PORTUGAL  
80820-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
KYRGYZSTAN  
FINLAND  
00-800-500-55-500  
030-6227 515  
PUERTO RICO  
1-800-682-3180  
FRANCE  
3260 SAMSUNG  
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676  
08 25 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/min)  
EIRE  
0818 717 100  
GERMANY  
01805 - SAMSUNG  
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)  
RUSSIA  
SINGAPORE  
8-800-555-55-55  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
HONG KONG  
HUNGARY  
1-800-299-0013  
800-7919267  
3698 4698  
1800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
SLOVAKIA  
0800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
06-80-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG  
(724-7864)  
SPAIN  
902-1-SAMSU(72678)  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
SWEDEN  
075-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
SWITZERLAND  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com/ch  
CHF 0.08/min)  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
THAILAND  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
444 77 11  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ae  
8000-4726  
U.K  
0845 SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
U.S.A  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
UKRAINE  
8-800-502-0000  
UZBEKISTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/kz_r  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
glossary  
CCD  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well  
as mentioned in this user’s guide.  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan  
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to  
prevent any damage when you move the machine.  
802.11  
Collation  
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)  
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards  
Committee (IEEE 802).  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
802.11b/g  
Control Panel  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of  
the machine.  
802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.  
802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps.  
802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave  
ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.  
Coverage  
Access point  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.  
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%  
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or  
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a  
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.  
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that  
connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local  
area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of  
WLAN radio signals.  
ADF  
CSV  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can  
scan some amount of the paper at once.  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to  
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is  
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the  
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
AppleTalk  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)  
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
DADF  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the  
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.  
BIT Depth  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color  
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits  
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for  
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and  
white.  
Default  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box  
state, reset, or initialized.  
DHCP  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters  
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information  
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also  
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.  
BMP  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file  
format on that platform.  
DIMM  
BOOTP  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,  
received fax data.  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap  
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The  
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each  
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP  
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.  
DNS  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,  
such as the Internet.  
Glossary_ 134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dot Matrix Printer  
FDI  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head  
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an  
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to  
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.  
DPI  
FTP  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
DRPD  
Fuser Unit  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers.  
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It  
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred  
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that  
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm  
when it comes out of a laser printer.  
Duplex  
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the  
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer  
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.  
Gateway  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a  
network that allows access to another computer or network.  
Duty Cycle  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation  
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of  
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty  
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer  
limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Grayscale  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented  
by various shades of gray.  
Halftone  
ECM  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.  
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter  
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into  
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and  
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes  
caused by telephone line noise.  
HDD  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data  
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
Emulation  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as  
another.  
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is  
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the  
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
IEEE  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement  
of technology related to electricity.  
Ethernet  
IEEE 1284  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized  
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in  
use during the 1990s to the present.  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to  
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to  
the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
Intranet  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of  
an organization's information or operations with its employees.  
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal  
website.  
EtherTalk  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now  
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
Glossary_ 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP address  
LDAP  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in  
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  
the Internet Protocol standard.  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over  
TCP/IP.  
IPM  
LED  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer  
can complete within one minute.  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates  
the status of a machine.  
MAC address  
IPP  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated  
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually  
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,  
00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network  
Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers  
trying to locate machines on large networks.  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so  
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution  
than older ones.  
MFP  
IPX/SPX  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the  
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a  
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and  
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for  
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this  
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
MH  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines  
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a  
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently  
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this  
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from  
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and  
commercial standards.  
MMR  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
ITU-T  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio  
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,  
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection  
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone  
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.  
Modem  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,  
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted  
information.  
MR  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T  
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is  
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
JBIG  
NetWare  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
JPEG  
OPC  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the  
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide  
Web.  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual  
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is  
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.  
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the  
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches  
from grits of a paper.  
Glossary_ 136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Originals  
PS  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,  
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but  
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
See PostScript.  
PSTN  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the  
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial  
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.  
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides  
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,  
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,  
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.  
RADIUS  
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for  
remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables  
centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and  
passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting)  
concept to manage network access.  
PABX  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
Resolution  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
PCL  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has  
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page  
printers.  
SMB  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated  
Inter-process communication mechanism.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed  
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a  
device independent and resolution independent format.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,  
text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server  
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.  
PostScript  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -  
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
SSID  
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network  
(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to  
communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a  
maximum length of 32 characters.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer  
to the printer.  
Print Media  
Subnet Mask  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can  
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and which  
part is the host address.  
PPM  
TCP/IP  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining  
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can  
produce in one minute.  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);  
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack  
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.  
PRN file  
TCR  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the  
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies  
many tasks.  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
Protocol  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
Glossary_ 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and  
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been  
made by various image processing applications.  
WPA-PSK  
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small  
business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the  
wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop  
devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a  
wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.  
Toner Cartridge  
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner  
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text  
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the  
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
TWAIN  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a  
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can  
be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft  
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
UNC Path  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network  
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a  
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.  
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a  
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
Watermark  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears  
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first  
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
WEP  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE  
802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP  
provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as  
it is transmitted from one end point to another.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is  
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be  
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant  
scanner.  
WPA  
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless  
(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the  
security features of WEP.  
Glossary_ 138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
index  
copying on both sides of originals 65  
cover copying 68  
edge erase 69  
error message 112  
A
extension telephone 84  
accessories  
installing 125  
ordering 124  
erasing background images 69  
general setup 94  
F
adjusting  
favorites settings, for printing 57  
tray size 42  
fax receiving  
poster copy 67  
admin setting 92  
reducing or enlarging copies 65  
selecting the size of originals 65  
selecting the type of originals 66  
transparency copying 68  
understanding the copy screen 64  
changing the receive mode 84  
extension telephone 84  
in answering machine/fax 84, 85  
receiving in duplex 85  
answering machine/fax 84  
AppleTalk protocol 95  
authentication  
network accounting 96  
printing a report 96  
fax sending  
D
delay sending 83  
redialing the last number 83  
resending automatically 83  
sending a fax 82, 84  
date setting 41  
B
default settings 93  
booklet printing 52  
booklets 52  
buttons  
changing the default settings 42  
loading paper 42  
setting a fax header 82  
fax setup 94  
faxing  
tray setting 50  
adjusting darkness 85  
adjusting resolution 85  
changing receiving mode 84  
checking stored documents 104  
delaying a fax transmission 83  
erasing background 85  
forwarding faxes 88  
mailbox 87  
poilling 86  
preparing to fax 81  
direct printing utility 58  
display screen 29  
document feeder 45  
duplex printing  
Job Status 31  
Power Saver 31  
C
checking stored document 104  
cleaning  
printing sent fax report 87  
receiving 84  
duplex sending  
scan unit 105  
receiving in Ans/Fax mode 84  
receiving in Tel mode 84  
receiving with an extension telephone 84  
redialing the last number 83  
selecting the original document type 85  
selecting the original’s color mode 85  
sending a fax in toll save time 87  
sending a priority fax 84  
sending for both sided originals 85  
setting the fax header 82  
setting up a fax phone book  
from a control panel 86  
from your computer 86  
scanning 76  
cleaning a machine 105  
color mode  
E
email address  
faxing 85  
scanning 77, 90  
entering email addresses by the address  
entering email addresses to input field 73  
global 73  
individual 73  
storing 73  
control panel 29  
convention 23  
copy setup 94  
copying  
erasing background  
adjusting darkness 66  
copying 69  
scanning 77  
storing fax numbers 86  
understanding the fax screen 81  
features 25  
collation 66  
error correction mode 94  
machine features 92, 128  
Index_ 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PostScript driver 51  
power saving feature 42  
print media feature 132  
printer driver 51  
memory upgrading 126  
L
language 41  
menu overview 97  
LCD display  
supplied software 32  
multi-purpose tray  
brightness 30  
browsing the machine status 92  
changing the display language 41, 42  
file format  
tips on using 47  
using special media 48  
scanning 77  
USB memory device 91  
LED  
font setting 43  
interrupt button 31  
understanding the status LED 30  
N
network  
front view 27  
FTP, scan 74  
authentication 96  
configuring TCP/IP 38  
driver installation  
Linux  
common Linux problems 121  
G
driver installation for network connected  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
Macintosh 40  
general settings 92  
glossary 135  
group  
installing environment 38  
introducing network programs 38  
setting up 38  
printer properties 61  
printing 60  
scanning 79  
supplied softwares 33  
system requirements 33  
unifled driver configurator 102  
email address for scanning 72  
group fax number 86  
notification  
H
receiving a fax in mailbox 87  
loading  
hard disk 26  
N-up copy 67  
in the document feeder 45  
originals on the scanner glass 44  
paper in multi-purpose tray 47  
help, use 58  
N-up printing  
I
special media 48  
ID copy 67  
O
M
ID stamp in copying 94  
OCR 78, 91  
machine information 92  
individual  
on hook dial  
hardware 29  
email addresses for scanning 73  
individual fax number 86  
machine setup 92  
optional service 96  
information 10  
Macintosh  
optional tray 124  
loading paper 46  
ordering 124  
common Macintosh problems 122  
driver installation for network connected  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
printing 59  
scanning 78  
sharing a machine locally 36  
supplied softwares 33  
system requirements 33  
interrupt button 31  
J
jam  
original document  
loading  
clearing paper 109  
tips for avoiding paper jams 108  
in the document feeder 45  
on the scanner glass 44  
job timeout setting 42  
original size  
scanning 77  
JPEG  
mailbox  
USB scanning memory device 77, 91  
creating mailbox 87  
deleting the data of the mailbox 87  
mailbox list 87  
original type  
copying 65  
scanning 77  
K
sending to remote mailbox 87  
keyboard  
understanding the keyboard 43  
output support 50  
maintenance parts 124  
overlay printing  
memory  
clearing memory 104  
delete 55  
Index_ 140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
Macintosh 60  
printing a document  
printing on both sides of paper  
Macintosh 60  
Windows 53, 62  
printing to a file 58  
using direct printing utility 58  
using overlay 54  
scanner glass  
loading documents 44  
P
scanning  
2 sided originals 76  
placing a machine 32  
adjusting the altitude 41  
authentication 74  
basic information 70  
changing settings 76  
changing the default settings 42  
erase background 77  
file format 77  
for local connection 73  
for network connection  
setting up 74  
to email 72  
to FTP, SMB 74  
polling  
deleting the polling document 86  
polling a remote fax 86  
storing the originals for polling 86  
poster, print 52  
printing a document  
PostScript driver  
Macintosh 59  
troubleshooting 120  
problems  
scan quality 77  
power saver  
copying problems 118  
paper feeding problems 114  
printing quality problems 116  
touch screen 114  
button 31  
using power save mode 42  
print media  
card stock 49  
Q
quality  
envelope 48  
glossy paper 49  
guidelines 45  
labels 49  
serial number 104  
service center registeration  
scanning 77  
usb cable-connected machine 34, 39  
letterhead paper 49  
output support 132  
paper tab in printer preferences 55  
photo paper 49  
preprinted paper 49  
setting the default tray and paper  
in the control panel 42  
setting the paper size 50  
setting the paper type 50  
special media 48  
service contact numbers 133  
SetIP program 101  
R
rear view 28  
Smart Panel  
regulatiory information 14  
font setting 43  
general information 99  
replacing  
ADF rubber pad 126  
SMB 71  
reports  
specifications  
fax report 87  
machine information 92  
copier 130  
faximile 131  
print media 132  
print resolution set  
resolution  
printing 55  
scanning 76  
print resolution, set  
Macintosh 59  
speed dial no. 86  
start button 29  
printer driver  
S
safety  
stop button 29  
printer preferences 55  
stored documents 104  
information 10  
using help 57  
storing email addresses  
group 73  
individual 73  
scan preset 78  
scan to email 72  
scan to server 74  
scanner  
printer properties  
opening printer preferences 55, 62  
printing  
supplies  
changing the default print settings 58  
changing the print percentage 53  
fitting your document to a selected paper  
Macintosh 59  
available supplies 124  
expected toner cartridge life 106  
monitoring the supplies life 104  
ordering 124  
loading documents 44  
lock switch 27  
replacing toner cartridge 125  
Index_ 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
SyncThru Web Service  
general information 99  
common Windows problems 120  
driver installation for network connected  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
printing 51  
scanning 70  
sharing a machine locally 36  
supplied software 32  
system requiremnets 33  
T
TCP/IP protocol 38  
time setting 41  
to USB memory device 89  
toner cartridge  
redistributing toner 107  
replacing the cartridge 125  
sending a toner notification 104  
storage 106  
toner save, set 56  
toner unit  
sending the toner reorder notification 104  
touch screen  
problem solving 114  
tray  
adjusting the width and length 45  
loading paper in multi-purpose tray 47  
ordering an optional tray 124  
TWAIN, scan 78  
U
understanding the fax screen 81  
understanding the scan screen 70  
USB cable  
changing scan feature 90  
driver installation 33  
USB memory device  
scanning to the USB memory  
changing scan feature 90  
file format 91  
file policy 91  
understanding the USB screen 89  
W
watermark  
WIA  
Index_ 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA CRT Television F27442 User Guide
Remington Styling Iron S 1008 User Guide
Rheem Water Heater GT 199DVN 1 User Guide
Ricoh Camcorder RICOH User Guide
Ricoh Printer DDP 70 User Guide
Ricoh Printer SP C440DN User Guide
Saitek Portable Speaker 3D 380 User Guide
Samsung DVD Recorder DVD R175 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven SMH9207ST User Guide
Seiko Watch Cal 5J22 5J32 User Guide